WO2020221111A1 - 一种调度切换方法及装置 - Google Patents

一种调度切换方法及装置 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020221111A1
WO2020221111A1 PCT/CN2020/086528 CN2020086528W WO2020221111A1 WO 2020221111 A1 WO2020221111 A1 WO 2020221111A1 CN 2020086528 W CN2020086528 W CN 2020086528W WO 2020221111 A1 WO2020221111 A1 WO 2020221111A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
time slot
scheduling
bwp
terminal
pdcch
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2020/086528
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
薛祎凡
王键
黄雯雯
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to CN202080029987.3A priority Critical patent/CN114128199A/zh
Priority to JP2021564665A priority patent/JP7201843B2/ja
Priority to AU2020265040A priority patent/AU2020265040B2/en
Priority to US17/607,682 priority patent/US20220232599A1/en
Priority to KR1020217038782A priority patent/KR20220002530A/ko
Priority to CA3135474A priority patent/CA3135474A1/en
Priority to EP20798895.7A priority patent/EP3961957A4/en
Publication of WO2020221111A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020221111A1/zh
Priority to JP2022205008A priority patent/JP7462018B2/ja

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0078—Timing of allocation
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/12—Wireless traffic scheduling
    • H04W72/1263—Mapping of traffic onto schedule, e.g. scheduled allocation or multiplexing of flows
    • H04W72/1273—Mapping of traffic onto schedule, e.g. scheduled allocation or multiplexing of flows of downlink data flows
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L27/00—Modulated-carrier systems
    • H04L27/26—Systems using multi-frequency codes
    • H04L27/2601—Multicarrier modulation systems
    • H04L27/2602—Signal structure
    • H04L27/26025—Numerology, i.e. varying one or more of symbol duration, subcarrier spacing, Fourier transform size, sampling rate or down-clocking
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0053—Allocation of signaling, i.e. of overhead other than pilot signals
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0058—Allocation criteria
    • H04L5/0064—Rate requirement of the data, e.g. scalable bandwidth, data priority
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0091—Signaling for the administration of the divided path
    • H04L5/0096—Indication of changes in allocation
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00—Power management, e.g. TPC [Transmission Power Control], power saving or power classes
    • H04W52/02—Power saving arrangements
    • H04W52/0209—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices
    • H04W52/0225—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices using monitoring of external events, e.g. the presence of a signal
    • H04W52/0235—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices using monitoring of external events, e.g. the presence of a signal where the received signal is a power saving command
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/04—Wireless resource allocation
    • H04W72/044—Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource
    • H04W72/0446—Resources in time domain, e.g. slots or frames
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/12—Wireless traffic scheduling
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/12—Wireless traffic scheduling
    • H04W72/1263—Mapping of traffic onto schedule, e.g. scheduled allocation or multiplexing of flows
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/12—Wireless traffic scheduling
    • H04W72/1263—Mapping of traffic onto schedule, e.g. scheduled allocation or multiplexing of flows
    • H04W72/1268—Mapping of traffic onto schedule, e.g. scheduled allocation or multiplexing of flows of uplink data flows
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/20—Control channels or signalling for resource management
    • H04W72/23—Control channels or signalling for resource management in the downlink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards a terminal
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/50—Allocation or scheduling criteria for wireless resources
    • H04W72/54—Allocation or scheduling criteria for wireless resources based on quality criteria
    • H04W72/542—Allocation or scheduling criteria for wireless resources based on quality criteria using measured or perceived quality
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00—Power management, e.g. TPC [Transmission Power Control], power saving or power classes
    • H04W52/02—Power saving arrangements
    • Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02—TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02D—CLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES IN INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES [ICT], I.E. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES AIMING AT THE REDUCTION OF THEIR OWN ENERGY USE
    • Y02D30/00—Reducing energy consumption in communication networks
    • Y02D30/70—Reducing energy consumption in communication networks in wireless communication networks

Definitions

  • the embodiments of the present application relate to the field of communication technologies, and in particular, to a scheduling switching method and device.
  • the base station when the base station schedules the data channel of the terminal, the base station first sends a scheduling information, and the data channel of the terminal (such as : The scheduling information of the physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) sent through the physical downlink control channel (physical downlink control channel, PDCCH) schedules the PDSCH of the terminal, or the physical downlink shared control channel sent through the PDCCH (physical downlink shared channel) channel, PUSCH) scheduling information to schedule the terminal’s PUSCH), the scheduling information can indicate the transmission parameters of the data channel, such as: the time domain resource location of the data channel, etc.
  • the terminal can set the time domain resource of the data channel according to the indication of the scheduling information
  • the location receives the data channel.
  • the above scheduling process can be divided into the following two scheduling methods based on the time-domain position relationship between the PDCCH and the data channel: simultaneous slot scheduling (single slot scheduling), where the PDCCH and the data channel are located in the same time slot; cross-slot scheduling (cross-slot scheduling) slot scheduling), the data channel and the PDCCH are located in different time slots, for example, the terminal can receive the data channel in the next time slot of the time slot occupied by the PDCCH.
  • the 3rd generation partnership project (3GPP) established a project on the topic of terminal power consumption saving in Rel-16, and discussed the dynamic switching scheduling method.
  • 3GPP 3rd generation partnership project
  • the terminal needs to turn on the radio frequency module of the terminal in real time to ensure the smooth transmission of the data channel.
  • the terminal can turn off the radio frequency module of the terminal before transmitting data on the data channel to reduce the power consumption of the terminal and achieve the effect of energy saving of the terminal.
  • how to indicate the scheduling mode of the terminal and the effective time of the scheduling mode have not been discussed.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a scheduling switching method and device to indicate the scheduling mode of the switching terminal and to specify the effective time of the scheduling mode.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a scheduling switching method.
  • a terminal receives a switching instruction sent by a network device for instructing the terminal to switch from a first scheduling mode to a second scheduling mode, and determines the effective time of the second scheduling mode so that When the effective time of the second scheduling mode arrives, the terminal adopts the second scheduling mode to schedule the data channel and/or the time for triggering the reference signal.
  • the handover indication may include one or more of the minimum K0 value, the minimum K2 value, the minimum aperiodic CSI-RS trigger offset value, and the minimum aperiodic SRS trigger offset value; or, the handover indication may include one Or multiple index values, the index value may be used to indicate the minimum K0 value or the minimum K2 value or the minimum aperiodic CSI-RS trigger offset value or the minimum aperiodic SRS trigger offset value.
  • K0 is the time slot difference between the time slot where the PDCCH is located and the time slot where the scheduled PDSCH is located;
  • K2 value is the time slot difference between the time slot where the PDCCH is located and the time slot where the scheduled PUSCH is located;
  • aperiodic CSI- The RS trigger offset value is the time slot difference between the time slot where the PDCCH is located and the time slot where the aperiodic CSI-RS is triggered;
  • the aperiodic SRS trigger offset value is the time slot where the PDCCH is located and where the aperiodic SRS is triggered The time slot difference between the time slots.
  • the first scheduling mode is different from the second scheduling mode.
  • the first scheduling mode is simultaneous slot scheduling, and the second scheduling mode is cross-slot scheduling; or, the first scheduling mode is cross-slot scheduling, and the second scheduling mode is simultaneous Slot scheduling, or both the first scheduling mode and the second scheduling mode are cross-slot scheduling, but the time slot difference between the time slot occupied by the PDCCH and the time slot occupied by the data channel scheduled by the PDCCH in the first scheduling mode is the same as the first In a scheduling mode, the time slot difference between the time slot occupied by the PDCCH and the time slot occupied by the data channel scheduled by the PDCCH is different.
  • the terminal In simultaneous slot scheduling, in order to ensure the reliability of data channel and/or reference signal transmission, the terminal needs to always turn on its own radio frequency module to buffer the data channel and/or reference signaling. Under cross-slot scheduling, the terminal can temporarily turn off its own radio frequency module to achieve the purpose of energy saving.
  • the terminal can receive a switching instruction sent by the network device for instructing the switching of the terminal's scheduling mode, and after receiving the switching instruction, determine the effective time of the switching scheduling mode, so that the terminal can switch
  • the scheduling mode is used to schedule the data channel and/trigger the reference signal, especially when the scheduling mode after the switching is cross-slot scheduling, shut down its own radio frequency module to enter the energy-saving state.
  • the handover indication is included in the PDCCH, and the effective time of the second scheduling mode is: the symbol next to the last symbol occupied by the feedback information of the PDCCH; or , The next time slot of the time slot occupied by the PDCCH feedback information; or, the first scheduling information monitoring opportunity after the time domain position occupied by the PDCCH feedback information; where the PDCCH feedback information is used to indicate whether the terminal is receiving correctly To PDCCH; the scheduling information monitoring timing is the timing for the terminal to monitor the PDCCH used for scheduling the data channel.
  • the symbol next to the last symbol occupied by the PDCCH feedback information can be a symbol adjacent to the last symbol occupied by the PDCCH feedback information, or any symbol after the last symbol occupied by the PDCCH feedback information. Symbol, this application does not restrict it.
  • next time slot of the time slot occupied by the feedback information of the PDCCH can be the time slot next to the time slot occupied by the feedback information of the PDCCH after the time slot occupied by the feedback information of the PDCCH, or it can be the time slot of the PDCCH. Any time slot after the time slot occupied by the feedback information.
  • the first scheduling information monitoring timing after the time domain position occupied by the feedback information of the PDCCH may be the scheduling information monitoring timing that appears for the first time after the time domain position occupied by the feedback information of the PDCCH, or it may be the PDCCH Any other scheduling information monitoring timing after the time domain position occupied by the feedback information.
  • the second scheduling mode can be effective after the feedback information of the PDCCH is sent. In this way, the reliability or accuracy of the terminal receiving the PDCCH including the handover indication can be guaranteed.
  • the handover indication is included in the PDCCH, which is used to schedule the downlink data channel of the terminal;
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is: feedback information of the downlink data channel The next symbol of the last occupied symbol; or the next time slot of the time slot occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel; or the first scheduling information after the time domain position occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel Monitoring timing; wherein the feedback information of the data channel is used to indicate whether the terminal receives the data channel; the scheduling information monitoring timing is the timing for the terminal to monitor the PDCCH used for scheduling the data channel.
  • the symbol next to the last symbol occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel may be the symbol adjacent to the last symbol occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel, or may be the symbol occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel. Any symbol after the last symbol.
  • next time slot of the time slot occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel may be a time slot adjacent to the time slot occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel after the time slot occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel It can also be any time slot after the time slot occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel.
  • the first scheduling information monitoring timing after the time domain position occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel may be the scheduling information monitoring timing that appears for the first time after the time domain position occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel. It may be any other scheduling information monitoring timing after the time domain position occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel, for example, it may be the Nth scheduling information monitoring timing after the time domain position occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel.
  • the second scheduling mode can take effect only after the transmission of the feedback information of the downlink data channel scheduled by the PDCCH including the handover indication is completed. In this way, it can be ensured that the terminal receives the downlink data channel scheduled by the PDCCH including the handover indication The reliability or accuracy of
  • the handover indication is included in the PDCCH, which is used to schedule the uplink data channel of the terminal;
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is: the next symbol occupied by the uplink data channel One symbol; or, the next time slot of the time slot occupied by the uplink data channel; or, the first scheduling information monitoring opportunity after the time domain position occupied by the uplink data channel; wherein the scheduling information monitoring time is used for terminal monitoring The timing of scheduling the PDCCH of the data channel.
  • the symbol next to the last symbol occupied by the uplink data channel may be a symbol adjacent to the last symbol occupied by the uplink data channel, or any symbol after the last symbol occupied by the uplink data channel.
  • the next time slot of the time slot occupied by the uplink data channel can be a time slot adjacent to the time slot occupied by the uplink data channel after the time slot occupied by the uplink data channel, or it can be occupied by the uplink data channel Any time slot after the time slot.
  • the first scheduling information monitoring timing after the time domain position occupied by the uplink data channel may be the scheduling information monitoring timing that appears for the first time after the time domain position occupied by the uplink data channel, or it may be the uplink data channel monitoring timing. Any other scheduling information monitoring timing after the occupied time domain position.
  • the second scheduling mode can take effect only after the transmission of the uplink data channel scheduled by the PDCCH including the handover indication is completed. In this way, it can be ensured that the terminal can successfully send the uplink data channel scheduled by the PDCCH including the handover indication. Reliability or accuracy.
  • the handover indication is included in the PDCCH, the PDCCH is located in the Nth time slot, and N is an integer; the effective time of the second scheduling mode is: N+M Time slots, or not earlier than the first scheduling information monitoring timing of the N+Mth time slot; where M is determined according to the minimum time slot difference effective when the terminal receives the handover instruction, and the time slot difference refers to the scheduling data The time slot difference between the time slot occupied by the PDCCH of the channel and the time slot occupied by the data channel scheduled by the PDCCH of the scheduling data channel.
  • M is equal to the minimum value; or, M is equal to the sum of the minimum value and the first value; or, M is the maximum value of the second value and the minimum value.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling method can be determined according to the time slot occupied by the PDCCH including the handover indication and the terminal's ability to process the PDCCH, and ensure that the terminal takes effect as much as possible after the PDCCH including the handover indication is resolved. the way.
  • the handover indication is included in the MAC CE, and the MAC CE is included in the PDSCH; the effective time of the second scheduling method is in the PDSCH After the time slot occupied by the feedback information, and the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the first time interval between the time slot occupied by the feedback information of the PDSCH; the feedback information of the PDSCH is used to indicate whether the terminal correctly receives the PDSCH.
  • the first duration is related to the time for the physical layer of the terminal to receive the PDSCH and transmit it upward to the MAC layer of the terminal.
  • the second scheduling mode can take effect after the terminal obtains the MAC CE including the handover indication from the PDSCH. In this way, the reliability or accuracy of the terminal receiving the MAC CE including the handover indication can be guaranteed.
  • the method further includes: the terminal receives an effective indication, the effective indication is used to indicate the effective time of the second scheduling mode; the terminal determines the effective time of the second scheduling mode The time includes: the terminal determines the effective time of the second scheduling mode according to the effective instruction.
  • the network device can directly indicate the effective time of the second scheduling mode to the terminal, so that the terminal can determine the effective time of the second scheduling mode according to the instructions of the network device, which is simple and easy to implement.
  • the effective indication is included in the PDCCH or PDSCH, for example, the effective indication may be included in the DCI in the PDCCH, or, The effective indication is included in the MAC CE in the PDSCH.
  • the network device can indicate the effective time of the second scheduling mode to the terminal through the PDCCH or PDSCH, and the indication mode is flexible and diverse.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is: the symbol next to the last symbol occupied by the data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information; or, the first The next time slot of the time slot occupied by the data channel scheduled by the scheduling information; or the first scheduling information monitoring timing after the time domain position occupied by the data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information; where the time domain position of the first scheduling information No later than the time domain position occupied by the handover indication, the scheduling information monitoring timing is the timing for the terminal to monitor the PDCCH used for scheduling the data channel.
  • the symbol next to the last symbol occupied by the data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information may be a symbol adjacent to the last symbol occupied by the data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information, or may be the first scheduling information scheduling symbol. Any symbol after the last symbol occupied by the data channel.
  • the next time slot of the time slot occupied by the data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information may be the time slot occupied by the data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information after the time slot occupied by the data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information.
  • the time slot adjacent to the slot may also be any time slot after the time slot occupied by the data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information.
  • the first scheduling information monitoring timing after the time domain position occupied by the data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information may be the scheduling information that appears for the first time after the time domain position occupied by the data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information
  • the monitoring timing can also be any other scheduling information monitoring timing after the time domain position occupied by the data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information, such as: the Nth scheduling after the time domain position occupied by the data channel scheduled for the first scheduling information Information monitoring timing, N is a positive integer.
  • the second scheduling mode can take effect no later than the completion of the transmission of the data channel scheduled by the scheduling information indicated by the switching, so as to ensure the reliability and accuracy of the data channel transmission.
  • the handover indication is included in the PDCCH
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is: the feedback information of the downlink data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information is occupied The symbol next to the last symbol; or, the time slot next to the time slot occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information; or the time slot occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information
  • the first scheduling information monitoring timing after the domain location; wherein, the time domain location of the first scheduling information is no later than the time domain location occupied by the handover instruction, and the scheduling information monitoring timing is the time when the terminal starts monitoring the PDCCH.
  • the symbol next to the last symbol occupied by the feedback signal of the downlink data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information may be a symbol adjacent to the last symbol occupied by the feedback signal of the downlink data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information, It may also be any symbol after the last symbol occupied by the feedback signal of the downlink data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information.
  • next time slot of the time slot occupied by the feedback signal of the downlink data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information may be after the time slot occupied by the feedback signal of the downlink data channel scheduled with the first scheduling information, and the first scheduling information
  • the time slot adjacent to the time slot occupied by the feedback signal of the scheduled downlink data channel may also be any time slot after the time slot occupied by the feedback signal of the downlink data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information.
  • the first scheduling information monitoring occasion after the time domain position occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information may be after the time domain position occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information
  • the first scheduling information monitoring timing can also be any other scheduling information monitoring timing after the time domain position occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information.
  • the second scheduling mode can take effect no later than the completion of the transmission of the feedback information corresponding to the downlink data channel scheduled by the scheduling information of the handover indication, so as to ensure the reliability of the downlink data channel transmission.
  • the first scheduling information is all scheduling information no later than the handover indication Among them, the scheduled data channel is the scheduling information of the data channel to be transmitted last.
  • the second scheduling mode can take effect no later than the completion of all data channels scheduled by the scheduling information of the handover instruction. In this way, the reliability of all scheduling no later than the handover instruction can be guaranteed.
  • the first scheduling mode and the second scheduling mode are indicated by at least one of the following parameters: effective The minimum K0 value, the effective minimum K2 value, the effective minimum aperiodic CSI-RS trigger offset value, and the effective minimum aperiodic SRS trigger offset value; where K0 is the time slot where the PDCCH is located and the scheduled PDSCH is located The time slot difference between time slots; K2 is the time slot difference between the time slot where the PDCCH is located and the time slot where the scheduled PUSCH is located; the aperiodic CSI-RS trigger offset value is the time slot where the PDCCH is located and the time slot triggered by it The time slot difference between the time slots where the aperiodic CSI-RS is located; the aperiodic SRS trigger offset value is the time slot difference between the time slot where the PDCCH is located and the time slot where the aperiodic SRS is triggered.
  • any one of the effective minimum K0 value, effective minimum K2 value, effective minimum aperiodic CSI-RS trigger offset value, and effective minimum aperiodic SRS trigger offset value can be used to indicate the terminal’s
  • the scheduling method is simple and easy.
  • the handover indication is included in the PDCCH, and the handover indication is also used to instruct the terminal to switch from the first BWP to the second BWP; the terminal determines The effective time of the second scheduling mode includes: the terminal determines the effective time of the second scheduling mode on the target BWP according to the time slot N where the PDCCH is located, the effective minimum time slot interval, and the target coefficient; where N is a natural number and the target coefficient According to the system parameter numerology of the target BWP and the numerology of the first downlink BWP, the first downlink BWP is the downlink BWP activated when the terminal receives the handover instruction.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is determined according to the system parameters of the BWP after the terminal handover and the system parameters of the downlink BWP currently activated by the terminal, so as to avoid the difference in the system parameters of the BWP. That is, when the subcarrier interval of the BWP of the terminal changes, the effective time of the scheduling mode changes.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is not earlier than the Qth time slot; Q is equal to Among them, M is equal to the effective minimum time slot interval; or, M is equal to the sum of the effective minimum time slot interval and the first value; or, M is the maximum value of the second value and the effective minimum time slot interval.
  • the second scheduling mode takes effect at the Qth time slot after the time slot in which the terminal receives the handover instruction, so as to at least ensure that the terminal can completely analyze the information including the handover instruction After the PDCCH, the second scheduling mode takes effect, which improves the accuracy of PDCCH reception.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is not earlier than the Qth time slot, including: the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the first The starting position of Q time slots.
  • the starting position of the Qth time slot can be used as the effective time of the scheduling mode, that is, the second scheduling mode takes effect when the Qth time slot arrives, which is simple and easy to implement.
  • the target coefficient is equal to Among them, ⁇ T is the parameter numerology of the target BWP, and ⁇ 1 is the numerology of the first downstream BWP.
  • the ratio of the system parameters of the BWP can be directly used as the target coefficient, which is simple and easy.
  • the first BWP is the first downlink BWP, and the second BWP is the second downlink BWP; and the first scheduling mode is the first downlink BWP.
  • Scheduling mode, the second scheduling mode is the second downlink scheduling mode; the target BWP is the second downlink BWP; alternatively, the first BWP is the first downlink BWP, and the second BWP is the second downlink BWP; the first scheduling mode is the first An uplink scheduling mode, the second scheduling mode is the second uplink scheduling mode; the target BWP is the first uplink BWP; alternatively, the first BWP is the first uplink BWP, and the second BWP is the second uplink BWP; the first scheduling mode is the first A downlink scheduling mode, the second scheduling mode is the second downlink scheduling mode; the target BWP is the first downlink BWP; alternatively, the first BWP is the first uplink BWP, and the first scheduling mode is the first uplink BWP, and the
  • the scheduling method provided in the present application is executed, and the application scenarios are diverse, which improves the applicability of the scheduling method provided in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the handover indication is also used to indicate one or more of the following parameters: the terminal’s PDCCH skips skipping, and the terminal monitors the PDCCH cycle , The multiple-input multiple-output MIMO parameters of the terminal, the search space monitored by the terminal, and /CORESET; wherein, the effective time of one or more parameters is the same as the effective time of the second scheduling mode.
  • the network device when the network device instructs to switch the scheduling mode and the BWP, it indicates other parameter information of the terminal and specifies that the effective time of the other parameter information is the same as the effective time of the scheduling mode, which is simple and easy to implement.
  • the present application provides a communication device, which may be a terminal or a chip or a system on a chip in the terminal, and may also be a terminal used to implement the first aspect or any possible design of the first aspect.
  • the communication device can implement the functions performed by the terminal in the foregoing aspects or various possible designs, and the functions can be implemented by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the aforementioned functions.
  • the communication device may include: a receiving unit and a determining unit;
  • the receiving unit is configured to receive a switching instruction sent by the network device for instructing the terminal to switch from the first scheduling mode to the second scheduling mode.
  • the determining unit is used to determine the effective time of the second scheduling mode.
  • the communication device For the specific implementation of the communication device, reference may be made to the behavior and function of the terminal in the scheduling switching method provided in the first aspect or any one of the possible designs of the first aspect, which is not repeated here. Therefore, the provided communication device can achieve the same beneficial effects as the first aspect or any possible design of the first aspect.
  • a communication device in a third aspect, is provided, and the communication device may be a terminal or a chip or a system on a chip in the terminal.
  • the communication device can implement the functions performed by the terminal in the foregoing aspects or various possible designs, and the functions can be implemented by hardware.
  • the communication device may include a processor and a communication interface, and the processor may be used to support the communication device to implement the first aspect or the functions involved in any possible design of the first aspect, for example :
  • the processor may receive, through the communication interface, a switching instruction for instructing the terminal to switch from the first scheduling mode to the second scheduling mode sent by the network device, and determine the effective time of the second scheduling mode.
  • the communication device may further include a memory, and the memory is used to store necessary computer-executed instructions and data of the communication device.
  • the processor executes the computer-executable instructions stored in the memory, so that the communication device executes the scheduling switching method as described in the first aspect or any possible design of the first aspect.
  • a computer-readable storage medium may be a readable non-volatile storage medium, and the computer-readable storage medium stores instructions when it runs on a computer. , So that the computer can execute the scheduling switching method described in the first aspect or any one of the possible designs of the foregoing aspects.
  • a computer program product containing instructions which when running on a computer, enables the computer to execute the scheduling switching method described in the first aspect or any one of the possible designs of the foregoing aspects.
  • a communication device may be a terminal or a chip or a system on a chip in the terminal.
  • the communication device includes one or more processors and one or more memories.
  • the one or more memories are coupled with the one or more processors, and the one or more memories are used to store computer program codes, and the computer program codes include computer instructions.
  • the communication device is caused to execute the scheduling switching method as described in the first aspect or any possible design of the first aspect.
  • the technical effects brought about by any one of the design methods of the third aspect to the sixth aspect may refer to the technical effects brought about by the above-mentioned first aspect or any possible design of the first aspect, and will not be repeated.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication system including the terminal and network equipment as described in any one of the second aspect to the sixth aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides another scheduling method, the method includes: a terminal receives minimum time slot interval indication information sent by a network device, and the minimum time slot interval indication information is used to indicate the minimum time slot interval of the target BWP; The terminal determines the minimum time slot interval of the target BWP according to the minimum time slot interval indication information and the system parameter numerology of the target BWP, and the minimum time slot interval of the target BWP is based on the numerology of the target BWP.
  • the terminal can determine the minimum time slot interval of the target BWP according to the information about the minimum time slot interval of the target BWP indicated by the network device.
  • the target BWP may be a BWP after the terminal is handed over, or may be a BWP activated when the terminal receives the minimum time slot interval indication information, which is not limited.
  • the minimum time slot interval indication information includes a value corresponding to the minimum time slot interval of the target BWP. Based on this possible design, the value of the minimum time slot interval associated with the target BWP can be indicated to the terminal, so that the terminal directly determines the minimum time interval of the target BWP according to the value, which is simple and easy.
  • the minimum time slot interval indication information includes a reference value corresponding to the minimum time slot interval; the terminal determines the minimum time slot interval of the target BWP according to the minimum time slot interval indication information and the numerology of the target BWP , Including: the terminal determines the minimum time slot interval of the target BWP according to the value corresponding to the reference minimum time slot interval, the reference numerology and the numerology of the target BWP.
  • the value of the reference minimum slot interval corresponding to the reference numrology can be indicated to the terminal, so that the terminal indirectly depends on the value of the reference minimum slot interval and the numerology of the reference numerology and the target BWP. Proportional relationship, determining the minimum time interval of the target BWP is simple and easy.
  • the minimum time slot interval indication information includes the first index value
  • the terminal determines the minimum time slot interval of the target BWP according to the minimum time slot interval indication information and the numerology of the target BWP, including: terminal Determine the minimum time slot interval of the target BWP according to the first index value, the first correspondence and the numerology of the target BWP; wherein the first correspondence includes the correspondence between the index value and the minimum time slot interval of the target BWP.
  • the index value corresponding to the value of the minimum time slot interval of the target BWP can be indicated to the terminal, so that the terminal indirectly determines the index of the minimum time slot interval according to the index value.
  • the value of the gap interval and the proportional relationship between the numerology and the numerology of the target BWP are referenced to determine the minimum time interval of the target BWP, which is simple and easy.
  • the minimum time slot interval indication information includes a second index value; the terminal determines the minimum time slot interval of the target BWP according to the minimum time slot interval indication information and the numerology of the target BWP, including: terminal According to the second index value, the second correspondence relationship, the reference numerology, and the numerology of the target BWP, the minimum time slot interval of the target BWP is determined; wherein the second correspondence relationship includes the correspondence between the index value and the reference minimum time slot interval.
  • the index value corresponding to the reference minimum time slot interval can be indicated to the terminal, so that the terminal indirectly determines the reference minimum time slot interval according to the index value, and then according to the reference minimum time interval, reference numerology and target BWP
  • the proportional relationship of numerology is simple and easy to determine the minimum time interval of the target BWP, and it is simple and easy to determine the minimum time interval of the target BWP.
  • the present application provides a communication device.
  • the communication device may be a terminal or a chip or a system on a chip in the terminal, and may also be a terminal for implementing the eighth aspect or any possible design of the eighth aspect.
  • the communication device can implement the functions performed by the terminal in the foregoing aspects or various possible designs, and the functions can be implemented by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the aforementioned functions.
  • the communication device may include: a receiving unit and a determining unit;
  • the receiving unit is used to receive the minimum time slot interval indication information sent by the network device, and the minimum time slot interval indication information is used to indicate the minimum time slot interval of the target BWP;
  • the determining unit is used to determine the minimum time slot interval of the target BWP according to the minimum time slot interval indication information and the system parameter numerology of the target BWP.
  • the minimum time slot interval of the target BWP is based on the numerology of the target BWP.
  • the communication device For the specific implementation of the communication device, reference may be made to the behavior and function of the terminal in the scheduling switching method provided in the eighth aspect or any one of the possible designs of the eighth aspect, which is not repeated here. Therefore, the provided communication device can achieve the same beneficial effects as the eighth aspect or any possible design of the eighth aspect.
  • a communication device may be a terminal or a chip or a system on a chip in the terminal.
  • the communication device can implement the functions performed by the terminal in the foregoing aspects or various possible designs, and the functions can be implemented by hardware.
  • the communication device may include: a processor and a communication interface, and the processor may be used to support the communication device to implement the eighth aspect or the functions involved in any possible design of the eighth aspect, for example :
  • the processor can receive the minimum time slot interval indication information sent by the network device through the communication interface.
  • the minimum time slot interval indication information is used to indicate the minimum time slot interval of the target BWP, according to the minimum time slot interval indication information and the system parameter numerology of the target BWP , Determine the minimum time slot interval of the target BWP.
  • the minimum time slot interval of the target BWP is based on the numerology of the target BWP.
  • the communication device may further include a memory, and the memory is used to store necessary computer-executed instructions and data of the communication device. When the communication device is running, the processor executes the computer-executable instructions stored in the memory, so that the communication device executes the scheduling switching method as described in the eighth aspect or any one of the possible designs of the eighth aspect.
  • a computer-readable storage medium may be a readable non-volatile storage medium, and the computer-readable storage medium stores instructions when it runs on a computer. At this time, the computer can execute the scheduling switching method described in the eighth aspect or any one of the possible designs of the foregoing aspects.
  • a twelfth aspect provides a computer program product containing instructions, which when running on a computer, enables the computer to execute the scheduling switching method described in the eighth aspect or any one of the possible designs of the foregoing aspects.
  • a communication device may be a terminal or a chip or a system on a chip in the terminal.
  • the communication device includes one or more processors and one or more memories.
  • the one or more memories are coupled with the one or more processors, and the one or more memories are used to store computer program codes, and the computer program codes include computer instructions.
  • the communication device is caused to execute the scheduling switching method according to the eighth aspect or any possible design of the eighth aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication system, including the terminal and network equipment as described in any one of the ninth to the thirteenth aspects.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides another scheduling method, the method includes: a terminal receives a handover instruction sent by a network device; wherein the handover instruction is used to instruct the terminal to switch from the first bandwidth part BWP to the second BWP ; The terminal determines the minimum time slot interval on the second BWP according to the minimum time slot interval on the first BWP, the system parameter numerology of the first BWP, and the numerology of the second BWP.
  • the minimum time slot interval of the BWP after the handover can be determined according to the system parameters of the two BWPs before and after the handover. In this way, the subcarrier interval of the two BWPs can be different before and after the handover. Next, timely adjust the minimum time slot interval of the BWP after the handover to ensure that the time length of the minimum time slot interval is the same.
  • the terminal determines the minimum time slot interval on the second BWP according to the minimum time slot interval on the first BWP, the numerology of the first BWP, and the numerology of the second BWP, including : The terminal determines the minimum time slot interval on the second BWP according to the minimum time slot interval on the first BWP and the first coefficient; where the first coefficient is determined according to the numerology of the second BWP and the numerology of the first BWP.
  • the first coefficient is equal to Wherein ⁇ 2 is the parameter numerology of the second BWP, and the ⁇ 1 is the numerology of the first downstream BWP.
  • the minimum time slot interval of the BWP after the handover can be determined according to the ratio of the system parameters of the two BWPs before and after the handover, which is simple and easy to implement.
  • the present application provides a communication device.
  • the communication device may be a terminal or a chip or a system on a chip in the terminal, and may also be a terminal used to implement the fifteenth aspect or any possible aspect of the fifteenth aspect. Design the functional modules of the described method.
  • the communication device can implement the functions performed by the terminal in the foregoing aspects or various possible designs, and the functions can be implemented by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the aforementioned functions.
  • the communication device may include: a receiving unit and a determining unit;
  • a receiving unit configured to receive a handover instruction sent by a network device; where the handover instruction is used to instruct the terminal to switch from the first bandwidth part BWP to the second BWP;
  • the determining unit is configured to determine the minimum time slot interval on the second BWP according to the minimum time slot interval on the first BWP, the system parameter numerology of the first BWP, and the numerology of the second BWP.
  • the communication device For the specific implementation of the communication device, reference may be made to the behavior and function of the terminal in the scheduling and switching method provided by the fifteenth aspect or any one of the possible designs of the fifteenth aspect, and details are not repeated here. Therefore, the provided communication device can achieve the same beneficial effects as the fifteenth aspect or any possible design of the fifteenth aspect.
  • a communication device may be a terminal or a chip or a system on a chip in the terminal.
  • the communication device can implement the functions performed by the terminal in the foregoing aspects or various possible designs, and the functions can be implemented by hardware.
  • the communication device may include: a processor and a communication interface, and the processor may be used to support the communication device to implement the fifteenth aspect or the functions involved in any possible design of the fifteenth aspect.
  • the processor may receive the switching instruction sent by the network device through the communication interface; wherein the switching instruction is used to instruct the terminal to switch from the first bandwidth part BWP to the second BWP; according to the minimum time slot interval on the first BWP, the first The system parameter numerology of a BWP and the numerology of the second BWP determine the minimum time slot interval on the second BWP.
  • the communication device may further include a memory, and the memory is used to store necessary computer-executed instructions and data of the communication device. When the communication device is running, the processor executes the computer-executable instructions stored in the memory, so that the communication device executes the scheduling switching method as described in the fifteenth aspect or any one of the possible designs of the fifteenth aspect .
  • a computer-readable storage medium may be a readable non-volatile storage medium, and the computer-readable storage medium stores instructions. When it runs on a computer, When the time, the computer can execute the scheduling switching method described in the fifteenth aspect or any one of the possible designs of the foregoing aspects.
  • a computer program product containing instructions which when running on a computer, enables the computer to execute the scheduling switching method described in the fifteenth aspect or any one of the possible designs of the foregoing aspects.
  • a communication device may be a terminal or a chip or a system on a chip in the terminal.
  • the communication device includes one or more processors and one or more memories.
  • the one or more memories are coupled with the one or more processors, and the one or more memories are used to store computer program codes, and the computer program codes include computer instructions.
  • the communication device is caused to execute the scheduling switching method according to the fifteenth aspect or any possible design of the fifteenth aspect.
  • the technical effect brought by any design method of the fifteenth aspect to the twentieth aspect can be referred to the technical effect brought by any possible design of the fifteenth aspect or the fifteenth aspect. Repeat it again.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication system, including the terminal and network equipment as described in any one of the fifteenth to the nineteenth aspects.
  • Figure 1 is a schematic diagram of PDCCH scheduling
  • Figure 2 is a schematic diagram of terminal energy saving according to an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 3 is a simplified schematic diagram of a system architecture provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of a scheduling switching method provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 6a is a schematic diagram of the effective time of a scheduling method provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 6b is a schematic diagram of the effective time of a scheduling method provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 6c is a schematic diagram of the effective time of a scheduling method provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 7a is a schematic diagram of the effective time of a scheduling method provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 7b is a schematic diagram of the effective time of a scheduling method provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 7c is a schematic diagram of the effective time of a scheduling method provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 8a is a schematic diagram of the effective time of a scheduling method provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 8b is a schematic diagram of the effective time of a scheduling method provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 8c is a schematic diagram of the effective time of a scheduling method provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 9a is a schematic diagram of the effective time of a scheduling method provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 9b is a schematic diagram of the effective time of a scheduling method provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 10a is a schematic diagram of the effective time of a scheduling method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 10b is a schematic diagram of the effective time of a scheduling method provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 10c is a schematic diagram of the effective time of a scheduling method according to an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 11a is a schematic diagram of the effective time of a scheduling method provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 11b is a schematic diagram of the effective time of a scheduling method provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 11c is a schematic diagram of the effective time of a scheduling method according to an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 11d is a schematic diagram of the effective time of a scheduling method provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 11e is a schematic diagram of the effective time of another scheduling method provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of the composition of a communication device 120 provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of the composition of a scheduling switching system provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • the physical downlink control channel is mainly used to carry downlink control information (DCI).
  • DCI can include public control information (such as system information, etc.) and user-specific information (such as downlink resources) Allocation instructions, uplink scheduling, random access response, uplink power control parameters, etc.).
  • the PDCCH can schedule data channels through the DCI carried by it.
  • DCI can be used to indicate the transmission parameters of the data channel (such as the time domain resource location of the data channel, etc.).
  • the network device can send the PDCCH to the terminal. After receiving the PDCCH, the terminal can demodulate the DCI in the PDCCH first, and then transmit the data channel on the time domain resource location indicated by the DCI.
  • the data channel can be used to carry data.
  • the 3GPP protocol divides the data channel into: physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) (or called uplink data channel) and physical downlink channel (PDSCH) (Alternatively called the downlink data channel).
  • PUSCH physical uplink shared channel
  • PDSCH physical downlink channel
  • the PUSCH is used to carry data sent from the terminal to the network device (or referred to as uplink data)
  • the PDSCH is used to carry data sent from the network device to the terminal (or referred to as downlink data).
  • the PDCCH may also indicate the time domain resource location of the channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS) through the DCI carried by it, to trigger the transmission of aperiodic (nonperiodic) CSI-RS, and/or,
  • the PDCCH can indicate the time domain resource location of a sounding reference signal (SRS) through the DCI carried by the PDCCH to trigger the transmission of aperiodic SRS.
  • SRS sounding reference signal
  • the network device can send the PDCCH to the terminal.
  • the DCI carried by the PDCCH is used to indicate the time domain resource position of the CSI-RS.
  • After the terminal receives the PDCCH it can demodulate the DCI in the PDCCH.
  • the CSI-RS sent by the network device is received at the time domain resource location indicated by the DCI.
  • the CSI-RS is used for the terminal to measure the channel state between the terminal and the network device.
  • the CSI-RS may include one or more channel state measurement resources.
  • the network device may send DCI and CSI-RS for indicating the time domain resource position of the CSI-RS to the terminal.
  • the terminal receives the CSI-RS at the time domain resource position indicated by the DCI and responds to the channel included in the CSI-RS.
  • the state measurement resource performs measurement, and reports channel state information (channel state information, CSI) to the network device according to the measurement result.
  • the SRS is used for network equipment to measure channel information between it and the terminal.
  • the network device can send the DCI indicating the time domain resource location of the SRS to the terminal, and the terminal receives the DCI.
  • the network device sends the SRS to the network device through part or all of the antennas of the terminal. Receive SRS, and measure the channel information between it and the terminal based on the received SRS.
  • the bandwidth part (BWP) is used to transmit signals.
  • the bandwidth part can be divided into two types: uplink bandwidth part (UPBWP) and downlink bandwidth part (DLBWP) according to the direction of the signal transmitted on the BWP.
  • the UP BWP can be used to transmit signals sent from the terminal to the network equipment, that is, the terminal can send uplink signals on the UL BWP;
  • the downlink BWP can be used to transmit the signals sent from the network equipment to the terminal, and the terminal can receive on the DL BWP Downlink signal.
  • the BWP parameters may include the numerology (system parameters or parameters) of the BWP.
  • the numerology corresponds to the sub-carrier spacing of the BWP, and the length of the time slot of the BWP, the length of the cyclic prefix (CP) and other parameters.
  • the subcarrier spacing of BWP is equal to 2 ⁇ ⁇ 15 [kHz]
  • ⁇ is the numerology of BWP. The larger the numerology of the BWP, the larger the sub-carrier spacing of the BWP, and the shorter the corresponding symbol length.
  • the length of one corresponding time slot is 1 ms
  • the length of one corresponding time slot is 0.5 ms
  • the following table a is a BWP parameter table, as shown in table a, numerology can have five values: 0 ⁇ 4, and the subcarrier intervals corresponding to these five values are: 15kHz, 30kHz, 60kHz, 120kHz, 240kHz .
  • the network device configures two DL BWPs, DL BWP1 and DL BWP2, for the terminal, and the activated DL BWP is DL BWP1.
  • the network device can send a BWP switching instruction through the PDCCH to instruct the terminal to switch from DL BWP1 to DL BWP2.
  • the network device can also instruct the terminal's activated UL BWP to switch through the PDCCH.
  • the numerology of the BWP before the switch and the BWP after the switch may be different.
  • one PDCCH may occupy one or more symbols in one slot.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the time slot occupied by the PDCCH, and the starting position of the symbols occupied by the PDCCH in the time slot and the number of symbols.
  • the network device configures the terminal in advance with scheduling information monitoring occasion, and the terminal starts to monitor the PDCCH when the scheduling information monitoring opportunity configured by the network device arrives.
  • the scheduling information monitoring opportunity can be configured to the terminal periodically, so that the terminal periodically monitors the PDCCH.
  • the time slot occupied by the PDCCH and the time slot occupied by the data channel scheduled by the PDCCH and/or the triggered reference signal may be the same or different.
  • the scheduling mode of the terminal is divided into: single slot scheduling, cross-slot scheduling.
  • Time slot scheduling (cross-slot scheduling) simultaneous slot scheduling may mean that the PDCCH and its scheduled data channel and/or triggered reference signal are located in the same time slot
  • cross-slot scheduling may mean that the PDCCH and its scheduled data channel and/or triggered reference signal are located in different time slots, for example :
  • the PDCCH and the scheduled PDSCH can be in the same time slot, that is, simultaneous slot scheduling, or in different time slots, that is, cross-slot scheduling.
  • the K0 value indicates whether the PDCCH and its scheduled PDSCH are scheduled at the same time or across time slots. Among them, the K0 value is the time slot difference between the time slot occupied by the PDCCH and the time slot occupied by the scheduled PDSCH.
  • the value of K0 has a value set, which is configured by the network device to the terminal, for example It can be ⁇ 0, 1, 2.ising ⁇ .
  • the network device can directly indicate the K0 value to the terminal, or the network device configures a time domain resource allocation (TDRA) table for the terminal.
  • the TDRA table includes the index value (index) and the K0 value corresponding to the index value.
  • the network device can indirectly indicate the K0 value to the terminal by indicating the index value to the terminal.
  • Table 1 below is a schematic diagram of the TDRA table configured by the network device for the terminal when the PDCCH schedules the PDSCH.
  • the TDRA table includes the corresponding relationship between the index value and the K0 value. As shown in Table 1, when the index value is 0, the K0 value When the index value is 1, the K0 value is 1; when the index value is 2, the K0 value is 1.
  • the network device schedules the PDSCH to the terminal through the PDCCH, the network device can configure the TDRA table shown in the terminal configuration table 1. Subsequently, if the network device indicates the index value of 1 to the terminal, the terminal can use the index value of 1 as the index and query the table 1. It is determined that the K0 value corresponding to the index value 1 is 1, and the PDCCH and PDSCH are in different time slots, that is, cross-slot scheduling.
  • the PDCCH and its scheduled PUSCH can be in the same time slot, that is, simultaneous slot scheduling, or can be in different time slots, that is, cross-slot scheduling.
  • the K2 value is used to indicate whether the PDCCH and its scheduled PUSCH are scheduled at the same time or across time slots.
  • the K2 value is the time slot difference between the time slot occupied by the PDCCH and the time slot occupied by the scheduled PUSCH.
  • the value of K2 has a value set, which is configured by the network device to the terminal, for example It can be ⁇ 0, 1, 2.ising ⁇ .
  • the network device can directly indicate the K2 value to the terminal, or the network device configures a TDRA table for the terminal.
  • the TDRA table includes an index value (index) and a K2 value corresponding to the index value.
  • the network device can indicate the index value to the terminal.
  • the K2 value is indirectly indicated to the terminal.
  • Table 2 below is a schematic diagram of the TDRA table configured by the network device for the terminal when the PDCCH schedules the PUSCH.
  • the TDRA table includes the correspondence between the index value and the K2 value. As shown in Table 2, when the index value is 0, the K2 value Is 0; when the index value is 1, the K2 value is 2.
  • the network device schedules the PUSCH to the terminal through the PDCCH, the network device can configure the TDRA table shown in Table 2 to the terminal.
  • the terminal can use the index value of 1 as the index and query the table Second, determine that the K2 value corresponding to the index value 1 is 2, the PDCCH and the PDSCH are in different time slots, and there is a difference of 2 time slots between the two, that is, cross-slot scheduling.
  • Table 1 and Table 2 are only exemplary tables. In addition to the content shown in the table, Table 1 and Table 2 may also include other content, such as starting and length indication values (starting and length). incdication value), mapping type (mapping type), etc., this application does not limit this.
  • the PDCCH and the triggered CSI-RS can be in the same time slot, that is, simultaneous slot scheduling, or in different time slots, that is, cross-slot scheduling.
  • an aperiodic CSI-RS trigger offset value (triggering offset) is used to indicate whether the PDCCH and the CSI-RS scheduled by it are scheduled at the same time or across slots.
  • the aperiodic CSI-RS trigger offset value is greater than 0, it means that the PDCCH and the triggered CSI-RS are in different time slots, that is, "cross-slot scheduling".
  • the network device may directly indicate the aperiodic CSI-RS trigger offset value to the terminal, or the network device may indicate the aperiodic CSI-RS trigger offset value to the terminal in other ways, which is not limited.
  • the PDCCH and the triggered SRS can be in the same time slot, that is, simultaneous slot scheduling, or in different time slots, that is, cross-slot scheduling.
  • an aperiodic SRS triggering offset is used to indicate whether the PDCCH and its scheduled SRS are scheduled at the same time or across slots.
  • the aperiodic SRS trigger offset value is the time slot difference between the time slot occupied by the PDCCH and the time slot occupied by the scheduled SRS.
  • the value of the aperiodic SRS trigger offset value can be included in the value set ⁇ In 0, 1, 2... ⁇ , the value set can be configured to the terminal by the network device.
  • the network device may directly indicate the aperiodic SRS trigger offset value to the terminal, or the network device may indicate the aperiodic SRS trigger offset value to the terminal in other ways.
  • the position of the time slot occupied by the PDSCH changes according to the change of the K0 value
  • the position of the time slot occupied by the PUSCH changes according to the change of the K2 value.
  • PDSCH0 is also located in the 0th time slot, that is, slot0 in Figure 1;
  • optimization can be carried out from two aspects: one is to improve the data transmission efficiency when there is business load (that is, there is data to be transmitted); the other is to improve the data transmission efficiency when there is no business load (that is, when there is no data to be transmitted). ), reduce the energy consumption of the terminal.
  • the second point it is mentioned in the report of the International Telecommunication Union-radiocommunications sector (ITU-R) that the energy consumption of the terminal can be reduced by increasing the proportion of the terminal in the sleep state.
  • ITU-R International Telecommunication Union-radiocommunications sector
  • the terminal In order to avoid data and/or signal loss, after receiving the PDCCH, the terminal must buffer the data and/or signal while decoding the PDCCH. As shown in the left part of Figure 2, the terminal needs time Turn on your own RF module to buffer data and/or signals.
  • the terminal knows in advance that the PDCCH and the data channel are scheduled across time slots, as shown on the right side of Figure 2, there must be no data channel scheduled by the PDCCH and/or trigger reference signals in the current time slot, then the terminal is receiving the PDCCH Afterwards, in the process of decoding the PDCCH, you can turn off your own radio module without buffering any data and/or signals to achieve energy saving. As shown on the right side of Figure 2, the shaded part corresponding to the t2 period is the energy saved by the terminal. .
  • the terminal when the terminal has no data service, the terminal should be placed in the "cross-slot scheduling" state to save power consumption (provided that all K0 meet K0>0); when the terminal has data service arrival At this time, the terminal should be in the state of "simultaneous slot scheduling" to ensure that the data transmission is completed quickly and to reduce time delay.
  • the network device dynamically indicates a minimum K0 value. For example, the minimum dynamic indication K0 is 3 and so on.
  • this solution simply describes how to indicate the scheduling mode.
  • the effective time of the "scheduling method" is not specified in detail.
  • the effective time of the scheduling mode may cause the problem of ambiguity of the signaling between the network equipment and the terminal.
  • the network device and the terminal may think that different forms are effective at a certain point in time.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a scheduling switching mode to clearly define the effective time of the scheduling mode switching.
  • Scheduling application handover method provided by the present embodiment may be used to support a variety of scheduling a communication system, such as: can be applied to the fourth generation (4 th generation, 4G) system, LTE (long term evolution, LTE) system, a fifth Any system in the 5th generation (5G) system, new radio (NR) system, NR-vehicle-to-everything (V2X) system, can also be applied to other next-generation communications
  • the system is not restricted.
  • the following uses the communication system shown in FIG. 3 as an example to describe the method provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication system may include a network device and multiple terminals (such as terminal 1 and terminal 2).
  • the terminal can be located in the coverage area of the network device, and is connected to the network device.
  • the terminal can receive the PDCCH sent by the network device, and send the PUSCH to the network device or receive the PDSCH sent by the network device under the instruction of the DCI included in the PDCCH, or receive it under the instruction of the DCI included in the PDCCH CSI-RS sent by the network device or report SRS to the network device, etc.
  • the network equipment is mainly used to implement functions such as terminal resource scheduling, wireless resource management, and wireless access control.
  • the network device may be any of a small base station, a wireless access point, a transmission receive point (TRP) transmission point (TP), and some other access node.
  • the device used to implement the function of the network device may be the network device, or may be a device or functional module capable of supporting the network device to implement the function, such as a chip system.
  • the scheduling switching method provided in the embodiment of the present application is described.
  • the terminal may be a terminal equipment (terminal equipment) or a user equipment (UE) or a mobile station (mobile station, MS) or a mobile terminal (mobile terminal, MT), etc.
  • the terminal in Figure 3 can be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, or a computer with wireless transceiver function, it can also be a virtual reality (VR) terminal, an augmented reality (AR) terminal, and an industrial control Wireless terminals in the smart city, wireless terminals in unmanned driving, wireless terminals in telemedicine, wireless terminals in smart grids, wireless terminals in smart cities, smart homes, vehicle-mounted terminals, etc.
  • VR virtual reality
  • AR augmented reality
  • the device for implementing the function of the terminal may be a terminal, or a device capable of supporting the terminal to implement the function, such as a chip system.
  • the following describes the scheduling switching method provided by the embodiment of the present application by taking an example that the device for implementing the function of the terminal is a terminal.
  • the network device can send a switching instruction to the terminal to instruct the terminal to switch from the first scheduling mode to the second scheduling mode, such as: switching from simultaneous slot scheduling to cross-slot scheduling, or from cross-slot scheduling
  • the scheduling switches to simultaneous slot scheduling.
  • the terminal can determine the effective time of the second scheduling mode, and when the effective time of the second scheduling mode arrives, the second scheduling mode is used to schedule the data channel and/or trigger the reference signal.
  • the second scheduling mode is cross-slot scheduling
  • the terminal turns off its own radio frequency module to achieve the purpose of energy saving.
  • the process can refer to the description in the embodiment corresponding to FIG. 5.
  • Fig. 3 is only an exemplary framework diagram, and the number of nodes included in Fig. 3 is not limited, and in addition to the functional nodes shown in Fig. 3, the communication system shown in Fig. 3 may also include other nodes, such as: Core network equipment, gateway equipment, application servers, etc., are not restricted.
  • the terminal shown in FIG. 4 may adopt the composition structure shown in FIG. 4 or include the components shown in FIG. 4.
  • the communication device 400 may be a terminal or a chip or a system on a chip in the terminal.
  • the communication device 400 may include a processor 401, a communication line 402, and a communication interface 403. Further, the communication device 400 may further include a memory 404. Among them, the processor 401, the memory 404, and the communication interface 403 may be connected through a communication line 402.
  • the processor 401 may be a central processing unit (CPU), a general-purpose processor network processor (network processor, NP), a digital signal processor (digital signal processing, DSP), a microprocessor, a microcontroller , Programmable logic device (PLD) or any combination of them.
  • the processor 401 may also be other devices with processing functions, such as circuits, devices, or software modules.
  • the communication line 402 is used to transmit information between various components included in the communication device 400.
  • the communication interface 403 is used to communicate with other devices or other communication networks.
  • the other communication network may be Ethernet, radio access network (RAN), wireless local area networks (WLAN), etc.
  • the communication interface 403 may be a radio frequency module, a transceiver or any device capable of implementing communication.
  • the embodiment of the present application only uses the communication interface 403 as a radio frequency module as an example for description.
  • the radio frequency module may include an antenna, a radio frequency circuit, etc., and the radio frequency circuit may include a radio frequency integrated chip, a power amplifier, and the like.
  • the memory 404 is used to store instructions. Among them, the instructions can be computer programs.
  • the memory 404 may be a read-only memory (read-only memory, ROM) or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and/or instructions, or it may be a random access memory (RAM) or Other types of dynamic storage devices that store information and/or instructions can also be electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), compact disc read-only memory, CD- ROM) or other optical disc storage, optical disc storage (including compact discs, laser discs, optical discs, digital versatile discs, Blu-ray discs, etc.), magnetic disk storage media or other magnetic storage devices, etc.
  • EEPROM electrically erasable programmable read-only memory
  • CD- ROM compact disc read-only memory
  • optical disc storage including compact discs, laser discs, optical discs, digital versatile discs, Blu-ray discs, etc.
  • magnetic disk storage media or other magnetic storage devices etc.
  • the memory 404 may exist independently of the processor 401, or may be integrated with the processor 401.
  • the memory 404 may be used to store instructions or program codes or some data.
  • the memory 404 may be located in the communication device 400 or outside the communication device 400 without limitation.
  • the processor 401 is configured to execute instructions stored in the memory 404 to implement the scheduling switching method provided in the following embodiments of the present application. For example, when the communication device 400 is a terminal or a chip in the terminal or a system on a chip, the processor 401 may execute instructions stored in the memory 404 to implement the steps executed by the terminal in the following embodiments of the present application. For another example, when the communication device 400 is a functional entity or a chip or a system on a chip in the functional entity, the processor 401 may execute instructions stored in the memory 404 to implement the steps performed by the functional entity in the following embodiments of the present application.
  • the processor 401 may include one or more CPUs, such as CPU0 and CPU1 in FIG. 4.
  • the communication device 400 includes multiple processors, for example, in addition to the processor 401 in FIG. 4, it may also include a processor 407.
  • the communication apparatus 400 further includes an output device 405 and an input device 406.
  • the input device 406 is a device such as a keyboard, a mouse, a microphone, or a joystick
  • the output device 405 is a device such as a display screen and a speaker.
  • the communication device 400 may be a desktop computer, a portable computer, a network server, a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a wireless terminal, an embedded device, a chip system, or a device with a similar structure in FIG. 4.
  • the composition structure shown in FIG. 4 does not constitute a limitation on the communication device.
  • the communication device may include more or less components than those shown in the figure, or combine certain components. , Or different component arrangements.
  • the chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
  • the actions, terms, etc. involved in the various embodiments of the present application can be referred to each other, and are not limited.
  • the name of the message or the name of the parameter in the message in the embodiment of the present application is only an example, and other names may also be used in specific implementations, which are not limited.
  • the switching instruction in the following embodiments can also be described as a power saving signal, etc., which is not limited.
  • FIG. 5 is a flowchart of a scheduling switching method provided by an embodiment of the application. As shown in FIG. 5, the method may include steps 501 to 502:
  • Step 501 The network device sends a handover instruction to the terminal.
  • the network device may be the network device in FIG. 3, and the terminal may be any terminal in the system shown in FIG. 3.
  • the switching instruction may be used to instruct the terminal to switch from the first scheduling mode to the second scheduling mode.
  • the first scheduling mode is different from the second scheduling mode.
  • the first scheduling mode can be simultaneous slot scheduling, and the second scheduling mode can be cross-slot scheduling; or, the first scheduling mode is cross-slot scheduling, and the second scheduling mode is simultaneous Slot scheduling, or both the first scheduling mode and the second scheduling mode are cross-slot scheduling, but the time slot difference between the time slot occupied by the PDCCH and the time slot occupied by the data channel scheduled by the PDCCH in the first scheduling mode is the same as the first In the first scheduling mode, the time slot difference between the time slot occupied by the PDCCH and the time slot occupied by the data channel scheduled by the PDCCH is different.
  • the value of K0 is 1, and the value of K0 in the second scheduling mode is 2, etc. , This application does not limit this.
  • simultaneous slot scheduling and cross-slot scheduling please refer to the above, and will not be repeated.
  • the handover indication may include an indicator for clearly indicating the second scheduling mode, and the indicator may be a binary bit number. For example, when the handover indication includes binary bit 0, it indicates the scheduling mode of the terminal. For simultaneous slot scheduling, when the handover indication includes binary bit 1, it indicates that the scheduling mode of the terminal is cross-slot scheduling.
  • the handover indication may include parameter values corresponding to the second scheduling mode.
  • the handover indication may include any one or more of the following parameter values: minimum K0 value, minimum K2 value, and minimum aperiodic CSI -RS trigger offset value, minimum aperiodic SRS trigger offset value, the terminal can determine which scheduling mode to switch to by using the parameter value included in the switching instruction. For example, if the handover indication includes the minimum K0 value and the minimum K0 value is greater than 0, it is determined that the terminal will switch to cross-slot scheduling. If the handover indication includes the minimum K0 value and the minimum K0 value is equal to 0, it is determined that there may be simultaneous slot scheduling. , There may also be cross-slot scheduling. If the handover indication includes the K0 value, and the K0 value is equal to 0, it is determined that the terminal will switch to simultaneous slot scheduling.
  • the handover indication may include an index value (index), and the index value may be used to indicate the second scheduling mode.
  • the index value (index) may be the same as the minimum K0 value or the minimum K2 value or the minimum non- Corresponding to the periodic CSI-RS trigger offset value or the minimum aperiodic SRS trigger offset value
  • the terminal can determine the minimum K0 value or the minimum K2 value or the minimum aperiodic CSI-RS trigger offset value or the minimum aperiodic SRS trigger offset through the index value Shift value, and further determine the scheduling mode of the terminal according to the minimum K0 value or the minimum K2 value or the minimum aperiodic CSI-RS trigger offset value or the minimum aperiodic SRS trigger offset value.
  • the network device may send a handover instruction to the terminal through the communication link between it and the terminal.
  • the handover instruction can be sent to the terminal through the PDCCH.
  • the handover instruction can be sent to the terminal through a certain field in the DCI transmitted by the PDCCH, or the handover instruction can also be sent to the terminal through other signaling, such as: handover instruction It can be sent to the terminal through a media access control control element (MAC CE) transmitted on the PDSCH, which is not limited in this application.
  • MAC CE media access control control element
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the naming of the handover indication.
  • the handover indication can also be named as other messages, for example: the handover indication can also be named as a power saving signal, etc. This application does not limit this .
  • Step 502 The terminal receives the switching instruction and determines the effective time of the second scheduling mode.
  • the terminal may receive the PDCCH sent by the network device, and obtain the switching instruction from the DCI included in the PDCCH; when the switching instruction is sent to the terminal through the MAC CE transmitted on the PDSCH , The terminal can receive the PDSCH sent by the network device, and obtain the handover indication from the MAC CE included in the PDSCH.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode may refer to the time during which the terminal can use the second scheduling mode to schedule data channels (such as PDSCH, PUSCH) and/or trigger reference signals (such as CSI-RS, SRS); or, second The time when the scheduling mode takes effect.
  • the terminal can adjust its own functional modules (such as: radio frequency module and processing module for demodulating PDCCH) Etc.), using the second scheduling mode to schedule the data channel and/or trigger the reference signal.
  • the terminal can turn off its own radio frequency module after the effective time of the second scheduling mode (including the effective time of the second scheduling mode) to achieve the purpose of energy saving of the terminal.
  • the reliability of the data channel transmitted between the terminal and the network device, etc. in order to ensure the reliability of the handover indication transmission, the reliability of the data channel transmitted between the terminal and the network device, etc., it can be based on whether the terminal correctly receives the PDCCH and whether the terminal correctly receives the data channel scheduled by the PDCCH.
  • One or more factors such as the situation and the ability of the terminal to process the PDCCH determine the effective time of the second scheduling mode.
  • the process of determining the effective time of the second scheduling mode may refer to the following mode 1 to mode 7.
  • the terminal can clarify the effective time of the switching scheduling mode after receiving the handover instruction, so that the terminal can use the second scheduling mode to schedule the data channel and/or trigger when the effective time of the second scheduling mode comes.
  • the terminal can be in a certain period of time after the effective time of the second scheduling mode (for example, when the terminal receives scheduling data) After the PDCCH and the time period before the demodulation of the PDCCH is completed) turn off its own radio frequency module to enter the energy-saving state.
  • the handover indication is included in the PDCCH.
  • the PDCCH may not be used for scheduling data channels and/or trigger reference signals, but may also be used for scheduling data channels and/or trigger reference signals, which is not limited in this application.
  • the switching indication included in the PDCCH can also be described as the switching indication carried on the PDCCH, or the switching indication is sent to the terminal through the PDCCH, or the switching indication is included in the DCI in the PDCCH and is a field in the DCI, or,
  • the switching instruction is sent to the terminal through the DCI on the PDCCH, or the switching instruction is the DCI in the PDCCH, etc., which is not limited in this application.
  • the PDCCH may correspond to feedback information. Once the terminal receives the PDCCH, the terminal will feedback its reception to the network equipment for the network equipment It is known whether the terminal has received the PDCCH correctly, and if the network device knows that the terminal has not received the PDCCH correctly, it will resend the PDCCH including the handover indication.
  • the feedback information corresponding to the PDCCH including the handover indication may be called PDCCH feedback information.
  • the PDCCH feedback information may be included in the PUCCH or PUSCH.
  • the PDCCH feedback information may occupy one or more symbols in a time slot, one symbol It can take tens of microseconds (us).
  • the feedback information of the PDCCH may be used to indicate whether the terminal correctly receives the PDCCH including the handover indication, and the feedback information of the PDCCH may be an acknowledgement message (acknowledge, ACK) or a non-acknowledge message (non-acknowledge, NACK). If the terminal receives the PDCCH correctly, it sends an ACK to the network device.
  • the terminal does not correctly receive the PDCCH including the switching instruction, it sends a NACK to the network device so that the network device retransmits the switching instruction to ensure that the PDCCH includes the switching instruction Reliability.
  • the terminal may use a cyclic redundancy check (cyclic redundancy check, CRC) method to verify whether it has correctly received the PDCCH including the handover instruction, which will not be described in detail.
  • CRC cyclic redundancy check
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode may be sent in the PDCCH feedback information including the switching instructions. after that.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode can be designed as shown in the following (1.1) or (1.2) or (1.3):
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the symbol next to the last symbol occupied by the feedback information of the PDCCH.
  • the symbol next to the last symbol occupied by the PDCCH feedback information can be a symbol adjacent to the last symbol occupied by the PDCCH feedback information, or any symbol after the last symbol occupied by the PDCCH feedback information. Symbol, this application does not restrict it.
  • the time length of one symbol may be several tens of microseconds (us), for example, the time length of one symbol may be 71 us.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the symbol next to the last symbol occupied by the feedback information of the PDCCH.
  • the start moment of the next symbol of the last symbol occupied, or any other moment in the symbol next to the last symbol occupied by the feedback information of the PDCCH, for example: may be the last symbol occupied by the feedback information of the PDCCH
  • the terminal receives the PDCCH including the handover indication at the first symbol of slot1, and sends the PDCCH including handover at the 12th symbol of slot1 to the network equipment.
  • the indicated PDCCH feedback information is shown by the dotted line in FIG. 6a, and the effective time of the second scheduling mode may be the 13th symbol or the 14th symbol after the 12th symbol in slot1.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode can be specifically the 1us of the 13th symbol or the 13th symbol.
  • the 50us of the symbol can also be the 71us of the 13th symbol, which is not limited in this application.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the next time slot of the time slot occupied by the feedback information of the PDCCH.
  • next time slot of the time slot occupied by the feedback information of the PDCCH can be the time slot next to the time slot occupied by the feedback information of the PDCCH after the time slot occupied by the feedback information of the PDCCH, or it can be the time slot of the PDCCH. Any time slot after the time slot occupied by the feedback information is not limited in this application.
  • the time slot described in the embodiment of the present application may include multiple symbols, for example, a time slot may include 12 or 14 symbols.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the time slot next to the time slot occupied by the feedback information of the PDCCH may include: the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the time occupied by the feedback information of the PDCCH
  • the start symbol of the next slot of the slot, or any other symbol in the next slot of the slot occupied by the PDCCH feedback information for example: it can be the slot next to the slot occupied by the PDCCH feedback information
  • the Rth symbol, R is a positive integer.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the next time slot occupied by the PDCCH feedback information.
  • the second scheduling mode may include: The effective time of is the start time of a symbol (such as the start symbol or any other symbol, such as the Rth symbol) in the next time slot occupied by the PDCCH feedback information, or the second scheduling mode
  • the effective time of is any other moment in a certain symbol in the next time slot occupied by the PDCCH feedback information, such as: the Qth us in a certain symbol, where Q is an integer, etc.
  • the terminal receives the PDCCH including the handover indication on the first symbol of slot1, and sends the PDCCH including the handover indication to the network device on slot1.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode may be the next time slot of slot1: slot2.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode can be the first symbol in slot2, the 10th symbol in slot2, or the 14th symbol in slot2, etc., or, When the time length of each symbol is tens of us, the effective time of the second scheduling mode can be the 1us of the first symbol in slot2, or the 10us of the first symbol in slot2, or it can be slot2 50us etc. of the first symbol in the middle.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the first scheduling information monitoring timing after the time domain position occupied by the feedback information of the PDCCH.
  • the scheduling information monitoring occasion can be the time when the terminal monitors the PDCCH used to schedule the data channel.
  • the scheduling information monitoring opportunity can occupy one symbol or multiple symbols in a time slot. This application does not To limit.
  • the terminal can start monitoring the PDCCH used for scheduling the data channel when the scheduling information monitoring opportunity arrives.
  • the network device can configure multiple scheduling information monitoring opportunities for the terminal, one or more time slots are spaced between two adjacent scheduling information monitoring opportunities, so that the terminal periodically monitors the PDCCH used for scheduling the data channel.
  • the second scheduling method starts to take effect when the first scheduling information monitoring opportunity arrives after the time domain position occupied by the feedback information of the PDCCH.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the time domain position occupied by the feedback information of the PDCCH.
  • the first scheduling information monitoring time after the PDCCH feedback information can include: the second scheduling mode takes effect The time is the start symbol of the first scheduling information monitoring occasion after the time domain position occupied by the feedback information of the PDCCH, and may also be any other symbol in the first scheduling information monitoring occasion.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the time domain position occupied by the feedback information of the PDCCH after the first scheduling information monitoring opportunity Including: the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the start time of a certain symbol (such as the start symbol or any other symbol) in the first scheduling information monitoring opportunity after the time domain position occupied by the feedback information of the PDCCH, or The effective time of the second scheduling mode is any other time in a symbol (such as the start symbol or any other symbol) in the first scheduling information monitoring opportunity after the time domain position occupied by the feedback information of the PDCCH.
  • the application is not restricted.
  • the first scheduling information monitoring timing after the time domain position occupied by the PDCCH feedback information may be the scheduling information that appears for the first time after the time domain position occupied by the PDCCH feedback information
  • the information monitoring timing can also be any other scheduling information monitoring timing after the time domain position occupied by the PDCCH feedback information, for example: it can be the Nth scheduling information monitoring timing after the time domain position occupied by the PDCCH feedback information, where N is Positive integer.
  • the terminal receives the PDCCH including the handover indication on the first symbol of slot1, and sends feedback of the PDCCH including DCI to the network device on slot1
  • the information including the time domain position occupied by the feedback information of the DCI PDCCH, is the first scheduling information monitoring opportunity located in slot3, then as shown by the dotted line in FIG. 6c, the effective time of the second scheduling mode may be slot3.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode can be the start symbol of slot3, such as: the first symbol in slot3, the tenth symbol in slot3, or slot3
  • the 14th symbol in the middle, or, taking the time length of each symbol as tens of us as an example, the effective time of the second scheduling mode can be the 1st us of the 1st symbol in slot3, or it can be the 1st us in slot3
  • the 10th us in the symbol can also be the 50 us in the 1st symbol in slot3, etc.
  • the handover indication is included in the PDCCH, and in addition to the handover indication, the PDCCH may also include scheduling information.
  • the scheduling information is used to schedule a downlink data channel (such as PDSCH) of the terminal.
  • the switching instruction included in the PDCCH can also be described as the switching instruction carried on the PDCCH, or the switching instruction is sent to the terminal through the PDCCH, or the switching instruction is sent to the terminal through the PDCCH, or the switching instruction is included in the DCI in the PDCCH , Is a field in the DCI, or the switching instruction is sent to the terminal through the DCI on the PDCCH, or the switching instruction is the DCI in the PDCCH, etc., which is not limited in this application.
  • the terminal in order to ensure the reliability of the downlink data channel scheduled by the PDCCH, the terminal needs to send feedback information of the downlink data channel to the network device. For example, once the terminal receives the downlink data channel scheduled by the PDCCH, the terminal will feedback its reception To the network equipment so that the network equipment knows whether the terminal has correctly received the downlink data channel scheduled by the PDCCH. If the network equipment knows that the terminal has not correctly received the downlink data channel scheduled by the PDCCH, the network equipment will resend the downlink data channel to the terminal. Ensure the reliability of downlink data channel transmission.
  • the feedback information of the downlink data channel may be included in the PUCCH or PUSCH, and the feedback information of the downlink data channel may occupy one or more symbols in a time slot, and one symbol may occupy several tens of microseconds (us).
  • the feedback information of the downlink data channel may be used to indicate whether the terminal correctly receives the downlink data channel scheduled by the PDCCH including the handover indication, and the feedback information of the downlink data channel may be ACK or NACK. If the terminal correctly receives the downlink data channel, it will send an ACK to the network device.
  • the terminal may use the existing technology to determine whether it has correctly received the downlink data channel scheduled by the PDCCH, which will not be described in detail.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling method can be the feedback information of the downlink data channel scheduled by the PDCCH After sending.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode can be designed as shown in the following (2.1) or (2.2) or (2.3):
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the symbol next to the last symbol occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel.
  • the symbol next to the last symbol occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel may be the symbol adjacent to the last symbol occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel, or may be the symbol occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel. Any symbol after the last symbol is not restricted by this application.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the next symbol of the last symbol occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel, which may include: the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the downlink data channel The start time of the next symbol of the last symbol occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel, or other moments in the next symbol of the last symbol occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel, such as: The Qth us in the symbol next to the last symbol occupied by the feedback information, where Q is a positive integer.
  • the terminal monitors the PDCCH including the handover indication on the first symbol of slot0, and the downlink data channel scheduled by the PDCCH is located in slot0, and the downlink data
  • the feedback information of the channel is in the 12th symbol of slot1, as shown by the dotted line in Figure 7a.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode can be the next symbol after the 12th symbol in slot1, such as: the 13th symbol in slot1 Or the 14th symbol, etc.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode may be the starting time of the 13th symbol, such as:
  • the 1us of the 13th symbol may also be the 50us of the 13th symbol, or the 71us of the 13th symbol, which is not limited in this application.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the next time slot of the time slot occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel.
  • next time slot of the time slot occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel may be a time slot adjacent to the time slot occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel after the time slot occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel It can also be any time slot after the time slot occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel, which is not limited in this application.
  • the time slot described in the embodiment of the present application may include multiple symbols, for example, it may include 12 or 14 symbols.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the time slot next to the time slot occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel may include: the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the feedback information of the downlink data channel The start symbol of the next time slot of the occupied time slot, or any other symbol in the next time slot of the time slot occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel, for example: can be occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel The Rth symbol in the next slot of the slot, R is a positive integer.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the time slot occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel
  • the next time slot may include: the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the start time of a symbol (such as the start symbol or any other symbol) in the next time slot occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel, or , Is the other time in a certain symbol in the next time slot of the time slot occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel, for example: the Qth time in a certain symbol in the next time slot of the time slot occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel A us, Q is an integer.
  • the terminal monitors the PDCCH including the handover indication on the first symbol of slot0, and the downlink data channel scheduled by the PDCCH including the handover indication is in slot0 ,
  • the feedback information of the downlink data channel is in the 12th symbol of slot 1, as shown by the dotted line in Fig. 7b
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode can be the next time slot of slot 1, for example, it can be the start time of slot 2.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode can be the start symbol in slot2, such as the first symbol, the tenth symbol in slot2, or the first symbol in slot2.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode can be the start time of the first symbol in slot2, for example: it can be the first symbol in slot2
  • the first us in slot2 can also be the 10th us in the first symbol in slot2, or the 50us in the first symbol in slot2, etc.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the first scheduling information monitoring timing after the time domain position occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel.
  • the related description of the scheduling information monitoring timing is as described in the first manner, and will not be repeated.
  • the first scheduling information monitoring timing after the time domain position occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel may be the first monitoring time after the time domain position occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel.
  • the second scheduling information monitoring timing can also be any other scheduling information monitoring timing after the time domain position occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel, for example: it can be the Nth time domain position after the time domain position occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel
  • N is a positive integer.
  • the second scheduling method is when the first scheduling information monitoring time comes after the time domain position occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel. take effect.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the time domain position occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel.
  • the first scheduling information monitoring opportunity after the first scheduling information monitoring opportunity may include: the second scheduling mode
  • the effective time is the start symbol of the first scheduling information monitoring occasion after the time domain position occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel, or the first symbol after the time domain position occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel Other arbitrary symbols in scheduling information monitoring timing.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the first scheduling information monitoring after the time domain position occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel
  • the timing may include: the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the start of a symbol (such as the start symbol or any other symbol) in the first scheduling information monitoring timing after the time domain position occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel.
  • the start time, or the effective time of the second scheduling mode is a symbol (such as the start symbol or any other symbol) in the first scheduling information monitoring opportunity after the time domain position occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel At any other time, this application is not limited.
  • the terminal monitors the PDCCH including the handover indication on the first symbol of slot0, and the downlink data channel scheduled by the PDCCH including the handover indication is located in slot0, and the feedback information of the downlink data channel is on the 12th of slot1.
  • the first scheduling information monitoring opportunity after the time domain position occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel is located in slot3, as shown by the dotted line in Figure 7c, the effective time of the second scheduling mode can be the start time of slot3 Or other moments.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode can be the first symbol in slot3, the 10th symbol in slot3, or the 14th symbol in slot3, etc., or , Taking the time length of each symbol as tens of us as an example, the effective time of the second scheduling mode can be the 1us of the first symbol in slot3, or the 10us of the first symbol in slot3, or It is the 71us etc. of the first symbol in slot3.
  • the handover indication is included in the PDCCH, and in addition to the handover indication, the PDCCH may also include scheduling information.
  • the scheduling information is used for scheduling an uplink data channel (such as PUSCH).
  • the switching instruction included in the PDCCH can also be described as the switching instruction carried on the PDCCH, or the switching instruction is sent to the terminal through the PDCCH, or the switching instruction is sent to the terminal through the PDCCH, or the switching instruction is included in the DCI in the PDCCH , Is a field in the DCI, or the switching instruction is sent to the terminal through the DCI on the PDCCH, or the switching instruction is the DCI in the PDCCH, etc., which is not limited in this application.
  • the terminal In the third mode, in order to ensure the reliability of the uplink data channel scheduled by the PDCCH, the terminal needs to take effect in the second scheduling mode after receiving the uplink data channel scheduled by the PDCCH.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode can be designed as shown in the following (3.1) or (3.2) or (3.3):
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the symbol next to the last symbol occupied by the uplink data channel.
  • the symbol next to the last symbol occupied by the uplink data channel can be the symbol adjacent to the last symbol occupied by the uplink data channel, or any symbol after the last symbol occupied by the uplink data channel.
  • the application is not restricted.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the symbol next to the last symbol occupied by the uplink data channel, which may include: the effective time of the second scheduling mode is occupied by the uplink data channel
  • the terminal monitors the PDCCH including the handover indication on the first symbol of slot0, and the uplink data channel scheduled by the PDCCH including the handover indication is located in slot0
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode can be the next symbol after the 12th symbol in slot0, such as: the 13th symbol or the 14th symbol in slot0, etc. .
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode may specifically be the start time of the 13th symbol in slot0.
  • the 1us of the 13th symbol, or the 50us of the 13th symbol, or the 71us of the 13th symbol is not limited in this application.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the next time slot of the time slot occupied by the uplink data channel.
  • the next time slot of the time slot occupied by the uplink data channel can be a time slot adjacent to the time slot occupied by the uplink data channel after the time slot occupied by the uplink data channel, or it can be occupied by the uplink data channel Any time slot after the time slot is not limited in this application.
  • the time slot described in the embodiment of the present application may include multiple symbols, for example, including 12 or 14 symbols.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the time slot next to the time slot occupied by the uplink data channel.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the time slot occupied by the uplink data channel.
  • the start symbol of the next time slot, or any other symbol in the next time slot of the time slot occupied by the uplink data channel, such as the Rth symbol in the next time slot of the time slot occupied by the uplink data channel, R is a positive integer.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is that the next time slot of the time slot occupied by the uplink data channel may include: second The effective time of the scheduling mode is the start time of a symbol (such as the start symbol or any other symbol) in the next time slot of the time slot occupied by the uplink data channel, or the time slot occupied by the uplink data channel At any other moment in a certain symbol in the next time slot, such as: the Qth us in a certain symbol in the next time slot of the time slot occupied by the uplink data channel, where Q is an integer.
  • the terminal monitors the PDCCH including the handover indication on the first symbol of slot0, and the uplink data channel scheduled by the PDCCH including the handover indication is located in The twelfth symbol of slot 0, as shown by the dotted line in FIG. 8b, the effective time of the second scheduling mode may be the next time slot of slot 1, for example, the start time of slot 1.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode can be the start symbol in slot1, for example: the first symbol in slot1, the tenth symbol in slot1, or The 14th symbol in slot1, etc., or when the time length of each symbol is tens of us, the effective time of the second scheduling mode can be the start time of the first symbol in slot1, for example: it can be the first symbol in slot1
  • the 1st us of a symbol can also be the 10th us of the 1st symbol in slot1, or the 71 us of the 1st symbol in slot1, etc.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the first scheduling information monitoring timing after the time domain position occupied by the uplink data channel.
  • the first scheduling information monitoring timing after the time domain position occupied by the uplink data channel can be the scheduling information monitoring that appears for the first time after the time domain position occupied by the uplink data channel
  • the timing may also be any other scheduling information monitoring timing after the time domain position occupied by the uplink data channel, for example, it may be the Nth scheduling information monitoring timing after the time domain position occupied by the uplink data channel, and N is a positive integer.
  • the second scheduling method starts to take effect when the first scheduling information monitoring opportunity arrives after the time domain position occupied by the uplink data channel.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the time domain position occupied by the uplink data channel and the first scheduling information monitoring opportunity may include: the effective time of the second scheduling mode It is the start symbol of the first scheduling information monitoring opportunity after the time domain position occupied by the uplink data channel, or any other symbol in the first scheduling information monitoring opportunity after the time domain position occupied by the uplink data channel.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the first scheduling information monitoring opportunity after the time domain position occupied by the uplink data channel It may include: the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the start time of a symbol (such as the start symbol or any other symbol) in the first scheduling information monitoring opportunity after the time domain position occupied by the uplink data channel, or , The effective time of the second scheduling method is any other time in a symbol (such as the start symbol or any other symbol) in the first scheduling information monitoring opportunity after the time domain position occupied by the uplink data channel. There is no restriction on this.
  • the terminal monitors the PDCCH including the handover indication on the first symbol of slot0, and the uplink data channel scheduled by the PDCCH including the handover indication is located on the 12th symbol of slot0.
  • the first scheduling information monitoring opportunity after the time domain position is located in slot2, as shown by the dotted line in FIG. 8c, the effective time of the second scheduling mode may be the start time of slot2 or other times.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode can be the first symbol in slot2, the 10th symbol in slot2, or the 14th symbol in slot2, etc., or , Taking the time length of each symbol as tens of us as an example, the effective time of the second scheduling mode can be the 1us of the first symbol in slot2, or the 10us of the first symbol in slot2, or It is the 71us etc. of the first symbol in slot2.
  • the above method 2 or method 3 only takes the PDCCH including the handover indication for scheduling data channels as an example, and explains the effective time of the second scheduling mode. It is understandable that when the PDCCH including the handover indication is still Used to trigger reference signals, such as: when triggering CSI-RS and/or SRS, in order not to affect the triggering of CSI-RS and/or SRS, the second scheduling method needs to take effect after CSI-RS and/or SRS is triggered, such as:
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode may be the symbol next to the last symbol occupied by the reference signal triggered by the PDCCH, or the effective time of the second scheduling mode may be the next symbol of the time slot occupied by the reference signal triggered by the PDCCH.
  • One time slot, or the effective time of the second scheduling mode may be the first scheduling information monitoring timing after the time domain position occupied by the reference signal triggered by the PDCCH.
  • the handover indication is included in the PDCCH, and the Nth time slot of the PDCCH.
  • the PDCCH may occupy one or some symbols in the Nth time slot, and N is an integer.
  • the PDCCH including the handover indication may be used for scheduling data channels and/or reference signals, or may not be used for scheduling data channels and/or reference signals, which is not limited in this application.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is related to the speed at which the terminal processes the PDCCH, and the speed at which the terminal processes the PDCCH corresponds to the minimum K0 value, minimum K2 value, and minimum aperiodic CSI-RS trigger offset value corresponding to the PDCCH.
  • One or more of the minimum aperiodic SRS trigger offset values are related. Taking the terminal processing speed of PDCCH and the minimum K0 value corresponding to the PDCCH as an example, when the minimum K0 value is relatively large, the terminal processing PDCCH speed is relatively slow, the effective time of the second scheduling mode will be relatively late; when the minimum K0 value If it is relatively small, the terminal can process the PDCCH faster, and the effective time of the second scheduling mode will be relatively earlier.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode can be designed as shown in the following (4.1) or (4.2):
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the N+Mth time slot.
  • N can be used to indicate the position of the time slot occupied by the PDCCH.
  • N may be the index number corresponding to the time slot occupied by the PDCCH. For example, if the time slot occupied by the PDCCH is slot 0, then N is 0.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the N+Mth time slot may include: the effective time of the second scheduling mode is a certain time in the N+Mth time slot
  • the start moment of a symbol (such as the start symbol or any other symbol), or any other moment in a symbol in the N+M time slot, for example: it can be in the N+M time slot
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is not earlier than the first scheduling information monitoring timing of the N+Mth time slot.
  • the related description of the scheduling information monitoring timing is as described in the first manner, and will not be repeated.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is no earlier than the first scheduling information monitoring timing of the N+Mth time slot.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is no earlier than the first scheduling information monitoring opportunity of the N+Mth time slot.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is not earlier than the start time of a symbol (such as the start symbol or any other symbol) in the first scheduling information monitoring opportunity of the N+Mth time slot, or 2.
  • the effective time of the scheduling mode is not earlier than any other time in a symbol (such as the start symbol or any other symbol) in the first scheduling information monitoring opportunity of the N+M time slot. This application does not To limit.
  • M is determined according to the minimum value of the time slot difference effective when the terminal receives the handover instruction.
  • the time slot difference refers to the time slot occupied by the PDCCH scheduling the data channel (and/or reference signal) and the time slot scheduled by the PDCCH
  • the time slot difference between the time slots occupied by the data channel (and/or reference signal), for example, the minimum value can be the minimum K0 value, or the minimum K2 value, or the minimum aperiodic CSI-RS trigger offset value, or , The minimum aperiodic SRS trigger offset value, etc.
  • the time slot corresponding to M is not earlier than the time slot corresponding to the minimum value.
  • the TDRA table configured by the network device for the terminal can be combined to indicate the minimum value to the terminal.
  • the network device can configure the TDRA table for the terminal and indicate to the terminal multiple index values in the TDRA table so that the terminal can read
  • the minimum value is determined among multiple values corresponding to multiple index values in the TDRA table.
  • the TDRA table configured by the network device for the terminal is shown in Table 1. The network device indicates to the terminal the first three rows of the TDRA table: index0, index1, and index2 are all valid, and the minimum value is determined to be 0 according to the query table 1.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode may be the N+Mth time slot after the Nth time slot. For example, if the time slot occupied by the PDCCH including the handover instruction is slot 0 and the minimum value is 2, the effective time of the second scheduling mode is slot 2.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode when each slot includes multiple symbols, and the effective time of the second scheduling mode is defined at the granularity of symbols, M can be equal to the product of the minimum value and (the number of symbols included in each slot), At this time, the effective time of the second scheduling mode may be after the last symbol occupied by the PDCCH including the handover indication, and the minimum value of the last symbol interval occupied by the PDCCH including the handover indication multiplied by (the symbols included in each slot Number) a symbol of symbols.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode There are 28 symbols separated from the 5th symbol in slot0, and the effective time of the second scheduling mode can be the 10th symbol in slot2.
  • the first value may be referred to as the effective time additional delay
  • the first value may be in units of time slots
  • the first value may be 1 time slot.
  • the first value may also be in units of symbols, for example, the first value may be 14 symbols or 12 symbols.
  • the first value is in the unit of time slot, and the effective time of the second scheduling mode can be the (N+minimum value+first value) after the Nth time slot. ) Time slots. For example, if the time slot occupied by the PDCCH including the handover indication is slot0, the minimum value is 2, and the first value is 1, the effective time of the second scheduling mode is slot3.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is defined at the granularity of symbols
  • the first value is in the unit of symbols
  • M can be equal to the minimum value multiplied by (each slot The number of symbols included) + the first value.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode may be the smallest interval between the last symbol occupied by the PDCCH including the handover indication and the last symbol occupied by the PDCCH including the handover indication The value is multiplied by (the number of symbols included in each slot) + a certain symbol of the first value.
  • the PDCCH including the handover indication occupies slot0, and the last symbol occupied by the PDCCH is the fifth symbol in slot0, the minimum value is 2, each slot includes 14 symbols, and the first value is 12 symbols, Then the effective time of the second scheduling mode is 40 symbols apart from the 5th symbol in slot 0, and the effective time of the second scheduling mode may be the 8th symbol in slot 3.
  • the time slot corresponding to M is no earlier than the time slot corresponding to the minimum value, and the time slot corresponding to M is no earlier than the time slot corresponding to the second value.
  • M may be the maximum value of the second value and the minimum value.
  • the second value can be called the minimum handover value.
  • the second value is related to the demodulation capability of the terminal's own PDCCH. The stronger the demodulation capability of the terminal, the smaller the second value may be, and the weaker the demodulation capability of the terminal is.
  • the value may be larger.
  • the second value is also related to the subcarrier interval currently configured by the terminal. The smaller the subcarrier interval, the longer the slot length, and the smaller the second value; the larger the subcarrier interval, the shorter the slot length. The second value may be larger.
  • the second value may be in units of time slots, for example, the second value may be 1 (time slots) or other values.
  • the first value may also be in units of symbols, for example, the first value may be 14 symbols or 12 symbols.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is defined with the time slot as the granularity
  • the second value is in the unit of time slot
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode can be the max (second value, minimum value) after the Nth time slot ) Time slots. For example, if the time slot occupied by the PDCCH including the handover indication is slot0, the minimum value is 2, and the second value is 1, the effective time of the second scheduling mode is slot2.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode when each time slot includes multiple symbols, and the effective time of the second scheduling mode is defined at the granularity of symbols, the second value is in the unit of symbols, and M can be equal to max (the second value, the minimum value is multiplied by Taking (the number of symbols included in each slot), at this time, the effective time of the second scheduling mode can be after the last symbol occupied by the PDCCH including the handover indication and the last symbol occupied by the PDCCH including the handover indication Interval max (the second value, the minimum value is multiplied by (the number of symbols included in each slot) symbol of a symbol.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is 28 symbols apart from the 5th symbol in slot0.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode may be the 10th symbol in slot2.
  • the terminal monitors scheduling information in slot0 and slot3, and when the PDCCH including the handover indication is received at the 10th symbol of slot1, and the terminal receives the PDCCH including the handover indication, the effective minimum K0 value is 0 .
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode may be the 1+1 time slot, that is, slot2; or, it takes effect no earlier than the first scheduling information monitoring time of slot2.
  • the second value is based on the symbol granularity
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is based on the symbol granularity
  • the second value is 5 symbols
  • the first value is 8 symbols
  • each time slot includes 14 symbols
  • the minimum effective The K0 value is 2.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode can still be the 1+2 time slot, namely slot3; or, the first scheduling information monitoring time not earlier than slot3 takes effect .
  • the second value is based on the symbol granularity
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is based on the symbol granularity
  • the second value is 5 symbols
  • the first value is 8 symbols
  • each time slot includes 14 symbols
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is independent of the time domain position occupied by the feedback information of the PDCCH, or, The effective time of the second scheduling mode is related to the time domain position occupied by the PDCCH feedback information.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is based on the time domain position occupied by the PDCCH feedback information as described in Mode 4 (4.1) or (4.2). The latest time in the effective time determined in) shall prevail, and the second scheduling time shall take effect after the latest time.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is independent of the time domain occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel scheduled by the PDCCH, or the effective time of the second scheduling mode is related to the PDCCH
  • the time domain position occupied by the feedback information of the scheduled downlink data channel is related, and the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the time domain position occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel scheduled by the PDCCH as described in Mode 4 (4.1) Or (4.2)
  • the latest time in the determined effective time shall prevail, and the second scheduling time shall take effect after the latest time.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is independent of the time domain position occupied by the uplink data channel scheduled by the PDCCH, or the effective time of the second scheduling mode is related to the PDCCH scheduling
  • the time domain position occupied by the uplink data channel is related to the time domain position occupied by the second scheduling mode.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is based on the time domain position occupied by the uplink data channel scheduled by the PDCCH as determined in (4.1) or (4.2) in Mode 4 The latest time among the times shall prevail, and the second scheduling time will take effect after the latest time.
  • the handover instruction is included in the media access control control element (MAC CE), and the MAC CE is included in the PDSCH.
  • MAC CE media access control control element
  • the MAC CE included in the PDSCH can also be described as the MAC CE carried on the PDSCH, or the MAC CE is sent to the terminal through the PDSCH, which is not limited in this application.
  • the second scheduling mode needs to take effect after the time slot occupied by the PDSCH feedback information, such as: 2.
  • the effective time of the scheduling mode is after the time slot occupied by the PDSCH feedback information, and the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the first time interval between the effective time of the second scheduling mode and the time slot occupied by the PDSCH feedback information; or, described as the second scheduling mode
  • the effective time is after the first time period after the time slot occupied by the feedback information of the PDSCH.
  • the feedback information of the PDSCH is used to indicate whether the terminal receives the PDSCH correctly.
  • the first duration is related to the time from when the physical layer of the terminal receives the PDSCH to when the MAC CE included in the PDSCH is transmitted to the MAC layer of the terminal.
  • the first duration may be equal to or greater than the time from when the physical layer of the terminal receives the PDSCH to when the MAC CE included in the PDSCH is transmitted to the MAC layer of the terminal.
  • the first duration may be 3ms.
  • Mode 6 The effective time of the second scheduling mode is no later than after all the data channels scheduled by the scheduling information of the switching instruction are transmitted, so as to ensure the normal transmission of the data channels.
  • the handover indication may be included in the PDCCH, and the PDCCH may be used for scheduling data channels and/or reference signals, or may not be used for scheduling data channels and/or reference signals, which is not limited in this application.
  • the data channel may be a downlink data channel or an uplink data channel
  • the reference signal may be a CSI-RS or SRS.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode can be designed as described in (6.1) or (6.2) or (6.3):
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the symbol next to the last symbol occupied by the data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information.
  • the symbol next to the last symbol occupied by the data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information may be a symbol adjacent to the last symbol occupied by the data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information, or may be the first scheduling information scheduling symbol. Any symbol after the last symbol occupied by the data channel is not limited in this application.
  • the symbols described in the embodiments of the present application have a certain length, and the time length of one symbol can be several tens of us, for example, the time length of one symbol can be 71 us.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the next symbol of the last symbol occupied by the data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information, which may include: the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the first The start time of the next symbol of the last symbol occupied by the data channel scheduled by a scheduling information, or other moments in the next symbol of the last symbol occupied by the data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information, such as: The Qth us of the symbol next to the last symbol occupied by the data channel scheduled for the first scheduling information, where Q is a positive integer.
  • the terminal monitors the handover indication in slot1, and there is scheduling information 1 before the handover indication (including the time domain position where the handover indication is located), and the scheduling information 1 is located in slot0.
  • the data channel called by the scheduling information 1 is located between the 5th symbol to the 14th symbol of slot2, as shown by the dotted line in Figure 10a, the effective time of the second scheduling mode can be the next symbol after the 14th symbol in slot2 , Such as: can be the first symbol in slot3.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode can be the start time of the first symbol in slot3, such as: 1us of the first symbol in slot3, or, in slot3
  • the 50us of the first symbol in slot 3, or the 71us of the first symbol in slot3, this application does not limit this.
  • the first scheduling method is used to schedule the downlink data channel.
  • the scheduling information 1 is in slot 0
  • the downlink data channel scheduled by the scheduling information 1 is received in slot 2
  • the scheduling information is received in slot 4 for scheduling.
  • the downlink data channel scheduled by scheduling information 3 is received in slot5.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the next time slot of the time slot occupied by the data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information.
  • the next time slot of the time slot occupied by the data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information may be the time slot occupied by the data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information after the time slot occupied by the data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information.
  • the time slot adjacent to the slot may also be any time slot after the time slot occupied by the data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information, which is not limited in this application.
  • the time slot described in the embodiment of the present application may include multiple symbols, for example, a time slot may include 12 or 14 symbols.
  • the Rth symbol in the next time slot of the time slot occupied by the data channel, R is a positive integer, or when a time slot includes multiple symbols and the time length of each symbol is tens of us
  • the second scheduling mode The effective time of is the next time slot of the time slot occupied by the data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information may include: the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the next time slot of the time slot occupied by the data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information The start time of a certain symbol (
  • the first scheduling mode and the second scheduling mode are both cross-slot scheduling, but the K0 value is 2 in the first scheduling mode, and the K0 value is 1 in the second scheduling mode.
  • the information is used to schedule the downlink data channel as an example.
  • the terminal monitors the handover indication in slot1, and there is scheduling information 1 before the handover indication (including the time domain position where the handover indication is located), and the scheduling information 1 is located in slot0.
  • the data channel called by the scheduling information 1 is located in the fifth symbol to the tenth symbol of slot2, as shown by the dotted line in Figure 10b, the effective time of the second scheduling mode can be the next time slot of slot2, such as slot3 Starting moment.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode can be the start symbol in slot3, such as: the first symbol in slot3, or the tenth symbol in slot3, or The 14th symbol in slot3, etc., or when the time length of each symbol is tens of us, the effective time of the second scheduling mode can be the start time of the first symbol in slot3, for example: it can be the first symbol in slot3
  • the 1st us of a symbol can also be the 10th us of the 1st symbol in slot3, or the 71us of the 1st symbol in slot3, etc.
  • the first scheduling method is used to schedule the downlink data channel.
  • the scheduling information 1 is in slot 0
  • the downlink data channel scheduled by the scheduling information 1 is received in slot 2
  • the scheduling information 2 is scheduled in slot 4.
  • the downlink data channel scheduled by scheduling information 3 is received in slot5.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the first scheduling information monitoring timing after the time domain position occupied by the data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information.
  • the first scheduling information monitoring opportunity after the time domain position occupied by the data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information may be the first time after the time domain position occupied by the data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information
  • the scheduling information monitoring timing can also be any other scheduling information monitoring timing after the time domain position occupied by the data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information, for example: after the time domain position occupied by the data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information
  • the second scheduling mode is the first scheduling information monitoring time after the time domain position occupied by the data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information. Effective then.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the time domain position occupied by the data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information and the first scheduling information monitoring opportunity may include: second The effective time of the scheduling mode is the start symbol of the first scheduling information monitoring occasion after the time domain position occupied by the data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information, or the time domain occupied by the data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information Other arbitrary symbols in the monitoring timing of the first scheduling information after the position. Or, when the first scheduling information monitoring opportunity occupies multiple symbols, and each symbol occupies tens of us, the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the first after the time domain position occupied by the data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information.
  • a scheduling information monitoring opportunity may include: the effective time of the second scheduling mode is a symbol in the first scheduling information monitoring opportunity after the time domain position occupied by the data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information (such as the start symbol or Other arbitrary symbols), or the effective time of the second scheduling mode is a symbol in the first scheduling information monitoring opportunity after the time domain position occupied by the data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information (for example: starting At any other time in the initial symbol or any other arbitrary symbol), this application does not limit it.
  • the terminal monitors the handover indication in slot1, and there is scheduling information 1 before the handover indication (including the time domain position where the handover indication is located), and the scheduling information 1 is in slot0.
  • the data channel called by the scheduling information 1 is located at the 5th symbol to the 10th symbol of slot 2, and the first scheduling information monitoring opportunity (scheduling information 3) after the time domain position occupied by the data channel called by the scheduling information 1 is located at the first Slot 4, as shown by the dotted line in Figure 10c, the effective time of the second scheduling mode may be the start time of slot 4.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode can be the start symbol in slot4, such as: the first symbol in slot4, or the tenth symbol in slot4, or The 14th symbol in slot4, etc., or when the time length of each symbol is tens of us, the effective time of the second scheduling mode can be the start time of the first symbol in slot4, for example: it can be the first symbol in slot4
  • the 1us of a symbol can also be the 10us of the first symbol in slot4, or the 71us of the first symbol in slot4, etc.
  • the downlink data channel is scheduled in the first scheduling mode.
  • the scheduling information 1 is in slot 0
  • the downlink data channel scheduled by the scheduling information 1 is received in slot 2
  • the scheduling information 2 is scheduled in slot 4.
  • the downlink data channel scheduled by scheduling information 3 is received in slot5.
  • the terminal when scheduling information to schedule a downlink data channel, in order to ensure the reliability of downlink data channel transmission, the terminal also needs to validate the second scheduling mode after sending the feedback information of the downlink data channel scheduled by the scheduling information.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode can be as described in (6.4) or (6.5) or (6.6) below:
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the symbol next to the last symbol occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information.
  • the symbol next to the last symbol occupied by the feedback signal of the downlink data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information may be a symbol adjacent to the last symbol occupied by the feedback signal of the downlink data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information, It may also be any symbol after the last symbol occupied by the feedback signal of the downlink data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information, which is not limited in this application.
  • the symbols described in the embodiments of the present application have a certain length, and the time length of one symbol can be several tens of us, for example, the time length of one symbol can be 71 us.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the last symbol occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information.
  • the next symbol may include:
  • the effective time is the start time of the next symbol of the last symbol occupied by the feedback signal of the downlink data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information, or the last symbol occupied by the feedback signal of the downlink data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information
  • Other arbitrary moments in the next symbol of the symbol such as: the Qth us of the next symbol of the last symbol occupied by the feedback signal of the downlink data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information, and Q is a positive integer.
  • the terminal monitors a handover indication in slot1, and there is scheduling information 1 before the handover indication (including the time domain position where the handover indication is located), and the scheduling information 1 is located in slot0.
  • the downlink data channel called by the scheduling information 1 is located in the first symbol to the seventh symbol of slot2, and the feedback information of the downlink data channel is located in the 12th symbol of solt2, as shown by the dotted line in Figure 11a, the second scheduling mode
  • the effective time can be the next symbol after the 12th symbol in slot2, for example, it can be the 13th symbol in slot2.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode can be the start time of the 13th symbol in slot2, such as 1us of the 13th symbol in slot2, or in slot2
  • the first scheduling method is used to schedule the downlink data channel. For example, before the dotted line, the scheduling information 1 is in slot 0, the downlink data channel scheduled by the scheduling information 1 is received in slot 2, and the scheduling information is received in slot 4 for scheduling. After the dotted line, the downlink data channel scheduled by scheduling information 3 is received in slot5.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the next time slot of the time slot occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information.
  • next time slot of the time slot occupied by the feedback signal of the downlink data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information may be after the time slot occupied by the feedback signal of the downlink data channel scheduled with the first scheduling information, and the first scheduling information
  • the time slot adjacent to the time slot occupied by the feedback signal of the scheduled downlink data channel may also be any time slot after the time slot occupied by the feedback signal of the downlink data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information.
  • the time slot described in the embodiment of the present application may include multiple symbols, for example, a time slot may include 12 or 14 symbols.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the time slot occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information.
  • the next time slot may include: the effective time of the second scheduling mode is The start symbol of the next time slot of the time slot occupied by the feedback signal of the downlink data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information, or the next time slot of the time slot occupied by the feedback signal of the downlink data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information
  • the other symbols in, such as: the R-th symbol in the next time slot occupied by the feedback signal of the downlink data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information, and R is a positive integer.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the next time of the time slot occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information
  • the slot may include: the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the start time of a symbol (start symbol or any other symbol) in the next time slot occupied by the feedback signal of the downlink data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode can be any time of a symbol (start symbol or any other symbol) in the next time slot occupied by the feedback signal of the downlink data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information, For example: the Qth us of a symbol (starting symbol or any other symbol), Q is an integer, etc.
  • the first scheduling mode and the second scheduling mode are both cross-slot scheduling, but the K0 value is 2 in the first scheduling mode, and the K0 value is 1 in the second scheduling mode.
  • the information is used to schedule the downlink data channel as an example.
  • the terminal monitors the handover indication in slot1, and there is scheduling information 1 before the handover indication (including the time domain position where the handover indication is located), and the scheduling information 1 is located in slot0.
  • the downlink data channel called by the scheduling information 1 is located in the first symbol to the seventh symbol of slot2, and the feedback information of the downlink data channel is located in the 12th symbol of solt2, as shown by the dotted line in Figure 11b.
  • the effective time can be the next time slot of slot2, for example, it can be the start time of slot3.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode can be the start symbol in slot3, such as: the first symbol in slot3, or the tenth symbol in slot3, or The 14th symbol in slot3, etc., or when the time length of each symbol is tens of us, the effective time of the second scheduling mode can be the start time of the first symbol in slot3, for example: it can be the first symbol in slot3
  • the 1st us of a symbol can also be the 10th us of the 1st symbol in slot3, or the 71us of the 1st symbol in slot3, etc.
  • the first scheduling method is used to schedule the downlink data channel. For example, before the dotted line, the scheduling information 1 is in slot 0, the downlink data channel scheduled by the scheduling information 1 is received in slot 2, and the scheduling information 2 is scheduled in slot 4. After the dotted line, the downlink data channel scheduled by scheduling information 3 is received in slot5.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the first scheduling information monitoring opportunity after the time domain position occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information.
  • the first scheduling information monitoring time after the time domain position occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information may be the time domain of the downlink data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information.
  • the scheduling information monitoring timing that appears for the first time after the time domain position occupied by the feedback information can also be any other scheduling information monitoring timing after the time domain position occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information, such as : It can be the Nth scheduling information monitoring timing after the time domain position occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information, and N is a positive integer.
  • the second scheduling mode is the first scheduling after the time domain position occupied by the feedback signal of the downlink data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information The information monitoring time comes into effect.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the time domain position occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information.
  • the first scheduling information monitoring opportunity can be Including: the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the start symbol of the first scheduling information monitoring occasion after the time domain position occupied by the feedback signal of the downlink data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information, or, scheduling for the first scheduling information Any other symbol in the first scheduling information monitoring opportunity after the time domain position occupied by the feedback signal of the downlink data channel.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the time domain position occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information
  • the subsequent first scheduling information monitoring opportunity may include: the effective time of the second scheduling mode is one of the first scheduling information monitoring opportunities after the time domain position occupied by the feedback signal of the downlink data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information
  • the start time of the symbol (such as the start symbol or any other symbol), or the effective time of the second scheduling mode is the first one after the time domain position occupied by the feedback signal of the downlink data channel scheduled by the first scheduling information
  • Any other time in a certain symbol (such as a start symbol or other arbitrary symbols) in the scheduling information monitoring opportunity is not limited by this application.
  • the first scheduling mode and the second scheduling mode are both cross-slot scheduling, but the K0 value is 2 in the first scheduling mode, and the K0 value is 1 in the second scheduling mode.
  • the information is used to schedule the downlink data channel as an example.
  • the terminal monitors the handover indication in slot1, and there is scheduling information 1 before the handover indication (including the time domain position of the handover indication), and the scheduling information 1 is located in slot0.
  • the downlink data channel called by the scheduling information 1 is located in the first symbol to the seventh symbol of slot2, the feedback information of the downlink data channel is located in the 14th symbol of solt2, and the time domain position occupied by the feedback information of the downlink data channel is after
  • the first scheduling information monitoring opportunity (scheduling information 3) is located in slot 4, as shown by the dashed line in FIG. 11c, and the effective time of the second scheduling mode may be the starting time of slot 4.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode can be the start symbol in slot4, such as: the first symbol in slot4, or the tenth symbol in slot4, or The 14th symbol in slot4, etc., or when the time length of each symbol is tens of us, the effective time of the second scheduling mode can be the start time of the first symbol in slot4, for example: it can be the first symbol in slot4
  • the 1us of a symbol can also be the 10us of the first symbol in slot4, or the 71us of the first symbol in slot4, etc.
  • the first scheduling method is used to schedule the downlink data channel.
  • the scheduling information 1 is in slot 0
  • the downlink data channel scheduled by the scheduling information 1 is received in slot 2
  • the scheduling information 2 is scheduled in slot 4.
  • the downlink data channel scheduled by scheduling information 3 is received in slot5.
  • the first scheduling information may specifically be no later than all scheduling information indicated by the handover, and the scheduled downlink data channel is the scheduling information of the downlink data channel to be transmitted at the latest.
  • the second scheduling mode takes effect after all the downlink data channels scheduled by the scheduling information of the switching indication are transmitted.
  • the rules for determining the effective time of the second scheduling mode described in Mode 1 to Mode 6 can be pre-defined in the agreement.
  • the terminal can search the agreement and follow the agreement. Specifies the effective time of the second scheduling mode.
  • any one or more of the above methods 1 to 6 can be combined to determine the effective time of the second scheduling method, that is, the time determined by any one or more of the methods 1 to 6 can be the latest As the effective time of the second scheduling mode.
  • the latest time among the time shown in (1.1) in the first mode, the time shown in (2.1) in the second mode, and the time shown in (4.1) in the fourth mode can be the latest time as the effective time of the second scheduling mode.
  • the latest time among the indicated times is used as the effective time of the second scheduling mode, etc.
  • the network device may also indicate the effective time of the second scheduling method to the terminal through dynamic signaling, as described in the following method 7:
  • Manner 7 The terminal receives an effective instruction sent by the network device, and the effective instruction may be used to indicate the effective time of the second scheduling mode; the terminal determines the effective time of the second scheduling mode according to the effective instruction.
  • the effective indication may be included in the PDCCH or PDSCH, for example: the effective indication may be the DCI in the PDCCH or the DCI included in the PDCCH, or the effective indication may be the MAC CE in the PDSCH or the MAC CE included in the PDSCH In this application, this application is not restricted.
  • the network device can indicate the effective time of the second scheduling mode for the terminal, which is simple and easy to implement.
  • the second scheduling mode may be adopted when the effective time of the second scheduling mode arrives or after the effective time of the second scheduling mode
  • the data channel and/or reference signal are scheduled until the terminal receives a new handover indication again, and the new handover indication is used to instruct the terminal to switch from the second scheduling mode to the first scheduling mode, the terminal does not terminate the second scheduling mode.
  • the method for determining the effective time of the second scheduling mode in the foregoing solution may be applicable to a scenario where the subcarrier interval of the BWP in which the terminal works is unchanged.
  • the BWP (uplink BWP and/or downlink BWP) of the terminal will switch, and the numerology of the BWP after the switch may be different from the numerology of the BWP before the switch.
  • the subcarrier interval of the BWP after the switch is different from the one before the switch.
  • the BWP subcarrier spacing may be different.
  • the process of determining the effective time of the second scheduling mode is as follows:
  • the terminal When the handover indication in step 501 is included in the PDCCH, and the handover indication is also used to instruct the terminal to switch from the first BWP to the second BWP, the terminal shall according to the time slot N where the PDCCH is located, the effective minimum time slot interval and the target coefficient , Determine the effective time of the second scheduling mode on the target BWP.
  • the effective minimum time slot interval may refer to the minimum K0 value effective when the terminal receives the handover instruction.
  • N is a natural number, such as: N can be 0 or 1, etc.
  • the target coefficient is determined according to the numerology of the target BWP and the numerology of the first downlink BWP, and the first downlink BWP is the downlink BWP activated when the terminal receives the handover instruction.
  • the target BWP can be an uplink BWP or a downlink BWP.
  • the target BWP is the uplink BWP; when the second scheduling mode is used to indicate the time slot where the PDCCH is located and the downlink scheduled by the PDCCH In the interval between time slots of the data channel, the target BWP is the downlink BWP.
  • the target BWP can be determined according to the scheduling mode and the switching situation of the BWP, such as:
  • the first BWP is the first downlink BWP
  • the second BWP is the second downlink BWP
  • the first scheduling mode is the first downlink scheduling mode
  • the second scheduling mode is the second downlink scheduling mode
  • the target BWP is the second downlink BWP
  • the first BWP is the first downlink BWP
  • the second BWP is the second downlink BWP
  • the first scheduling mode is the first uplink scheduling mode
  • the second scheduling mode is the second uplink scheduling mode
  • the target BWP is the first uplink BWP; or
  • the first BWP is the first uplink BWP
  • the second BWP is the second uplink BWP
  • the first scheduling mode is the first downlink scheduling mode
  • the second scheduling mode is the second downlink scheduling mode
  • the target BWP is the first downlink BWP
  • the first BWP is the first uplink BWP
  • the second BWP is the second uplink BWP
  • the first scheduling mode is the first uplink scheduling mode
  • the second scheduling mode is the second uplink scheduling mode
  • the target BWP is the second uplink BWP.
  • the target coefficient can be equal to Among them, ⁇ T is the parameter numerology of the target BWP, and ⁇ 1 is the numerology of the first downstream BWP. Or it can be described as the target coefficient equal to And so on, without restriction.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode is not earlier than the Qth time slot.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode may be the start position of the Qth time slot or the start symbol of the Qth time slot
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode may be any other symbol in the Qth time slot or other time slots after the Qth time slot, etc., which is not limited.
  • the terminal can refer to the above methods to determine the effective time of the scheduling mode after the switching in the scenario where the uplink scheduling mode, the downlink scheduling mode, and the uplink BWP and the downlink BWP are both switched, which will not be repeated.
  • Case 1 The handover instruction received by the terminal from the network device is used to instruct the terminal to switch from the first downlink scheduling mode to the second downlink scheduling mode, and to instruct the terminal to switch from the first downlink BWP to the second downlink BWP.
  • the terminal determining the effective time of the second downlink scheduling mode includes: the terminal according to the time slot N of the PDCCH, the effective minimum time slot interval and the coefficient Determine the effective time of the second downlink scheduling mode on the second downlink BWP.
  • the effective time of the second downlink scheduling mode is not earlier than the first Time slots, that is, the terminal will be no earlier than the time slot on the second downlink BWP Use the second downlink scheduling mode.
  • K0 min is the minimum value of K0 that takes effect when the terminal receives the handover instruction on the first downlink BWP
  • ⁇ DL,new is the numerology of the second downlink BWP
  • ⁇ DL,old is the numerology of the first downlink BWP. Indicates rounding up.
  • the downlink BWP currently activated by the terminal is DL BWP1
  • the numerology of DL BWP1 is 1
  • the subcarrier interval of DL BWP1 is 30 kHz. If the terminal receives a PDCCH including a handover indication in time slot n, the handover indication is only used to instruct the terminal to switch from the first downlink scheduling mode to the second downlink scheduling mode (for example, indicating a new minimum K0 value), and BWP switching is not instructed.
  • the effective time of the second downlink scheduling mode is no earlier than the n+max(1,2)th time slot , Such as: it can be the start position of the n+2th time slot.
  • the switching instruction is also used to instruct the terminal to switch from DL BWP1 to DL BWP2, and the numerology of DL BWP2 is 0, the subcarrier interval of DL BWP1 is 15kHz, because the time slot length of DL BWP2 is twice the length of DL BWP1, As shown in Figure 11d, on DL BWP2, the effective time of the second downlink scheduling mode is the first Time slots, such as: DL BWP2, the first The starting position of a time slot.
  • the effective time of the second downlink scheduling mode is the n+max(1, 3)th time slot, such as: It is the starting position of the n+3th time slot.
  • the switching instruction is also used to instruct the terminal to switch from DL BWP1 to DL BWP2, and the numerology of DL BWP2 is 0, the subcarrier interval of DL BWP1 is 15kHz, because the time slot length of DL BWP2 is twice the length of DL BWP1, As shown in Figure 11d, on DL BWP2, the effective time of the second downlink scheduling mode is the first Time slots, such as: DL BWP2, the first The starting position of a time slot.
  • Case 2 The handover instruction received by the terminal from the network device is used to instruct the terminal to switch from the first uplink scheduling mode to the second uplink scheduling mode, and to instruct the terminal to switch from the first uplink BWP to the second uplink BWP.
  • the terminal determining the effective time of the second uplink scheduling mode includes: the terminal according to the time slot N where the PDCCH is located, the effective minimum time slot interval and the coefficient Determine the effective time of the second uplink scheduling mode on the second uplink BWP.
  • the effective time of the second uplink scheduling mode is not earlier than the first Time slots, that is, the terminal will be no earlier than the time slot on the second uplink BWP Use the second uplink scheduling method.
  • K0 min is the minimum value of K0 that takes effect when the terminal receives the handover instruction on the first downlink BWP
  • ⁇ UL,new is the numerology of the second uplink BWP
  • ⁇ DL,old is the numerology of the first downlink BWP. Indicates rounding up.
  • the currently activated uplink BWP of the terminal is UL BWP1
  • the downlink BWP is DL BWP1
  • the numerology of UL BWP1 and DL BWP1 is 1, and the subcarrier interval is 30 kHz.
  • the handover indication is only used to instruct the terminal to switch from the first uplink scheduling mode to the second uplink scheduling mode (for example, indicate a new minimum K2 value), but not Indicate the BWP handover.
  • the effective time of the second uplink scheduling mode is not earlier than the n+2th time slot, such as: The starting position of n+2 time slots.
  • the switching instruction is also used to instruct the terminal to switch from UL BWP1 to UL BWP2, and the numerology of UL BWP2 is 0, the subcarrier interval of UL BWP1 is 15kHz, because the time slot length of UL BWP2 is twice the length of UL BWP1, As shown in Figure 11e, on UL BWP2, the effective time of the second uplink scheduling mode is the first Time slots, such as: UL BWP2, the first The starting position of a time slot.
  • the effective time of the second uplink scheduling mode is the n+3th time slot, for example, it can be the n+3th time slot.
  • the starting position of a time slot is the n+3th time slot.
  • the switching instruction is also used to instruct the terminal to switch from UL BWP1 to UL BWP2, and the numerology of UL BWP2 is 0, the subcarrier interval of UL BWP1 is 15kHz, because the time slot length of UL BWP2 is twice the length of UL BWP1, As shown in Figure 11d, on UL BWP2, the effective time of the second uplink scheduling mode is the first Time slots, such as: can be UL BWP2, the first The starting position of a time slot.
  • Case 3 The handover indication is used to instruct the terminal to switch from the first downlink scheduling mode to the second downlink scheduling mode, and to instruct the terminal to switch from the first uplink BWP to the second uplink BWP.
  • the network device instructs the switching of the downlink scheduling mode and the switching of the uplink BWP.
  • the downlink BWP is not switched, and the downlink BWP that the terminal works is still the first downlink BWP activated when the terminal receives the switching instruction. Therefore, the terminal Determining the effective time of the second downlink scheduling mode includes: the terminal according to the time slot N of the PDCCH, the effective minimum time slot interval and the coefficient Determine the effective time of the second downlink scheduling mode on the first downlink BWP.
  • the effective time of the second uplink scheduling mode is not earlier than the first downlink BWP Time slots, of which, That is, the terminal will use the second downlink scheduling mode no earlier than the time slot N+max(1, K0 min ) on the first downlink BWP.
  • K0 min is the minimum value of K0 that takes effect when the terminal receives the handover instruction on the first downlink BWP
  • ⁇ DL,old is the numerology of the first downlink BWP.
  • the switching instruction may also be used to instruct the terminal to switch from the first uplink scheduling mode to the second uplink scheduling mode.
  • the effective time of the second uplink scheduling mode can be determined with reference to the second uplink scheduling mode.
  • the terminal determining the effective time of the second uplink scheduling mode includes: the terminal according to the time slot N of the PDCCH, the effective minimum time slot interval and the coefficient Determine the effective time of the second uplink scheduling mode on the second uplink BWP.
  • the effective time of the second uplink scheduling mode is no earlier than Time slots, that is, the terminal will be no earlier than the time slot on the second uplink BWP Use the second downlink scheduling mode.
  • Case 4 The handover indication is used to instruct the terminal to switch from the first uplink scheduling mode to the second uplink scheduling mode, and to instruct the terminal to switch from the first downlink BWP to the second downlink BWP.
  • the network device instructs the switching of the uplink scheduling mode and the switching of the downlink BWP.
  • the uplink BWP is not switched, and the uplink BWP of the terminal is still the first uplink BWP activated when the terminal receives the switching instruction. Therefore, the terminal determines The effective time of the second uplink scheduling mode includes: the terminal according to the time slot N of the PDCCH, the effective minimum time slot interval and the coefficient Determine the effective time of the second uplink scheduling mode on the first uplink BWP.
  • the effective time of the second uplink scheduling mode is not earlier than the first uplink BWP Time slots, that is, the terminal will be no earlier than the time slot on the first uplink BWP Use the second uplink scheduling method.
  • K0 min is the effective minimum value of K0
  • ⁇ DL,old is the numerology of the first downstream BWP
  • ⁇ UL,old is the numerology of the first upstream BWP.
  • the handover indication can also be used to instruct the terminal to switch from the first downlink scheduling mode to the second downlink scheduling mode.
  • the terminal can refer to Case 1 to determine the effective time of the second downlink scheduling mode including: the terminal according to the PDCCH The time slot N, the effective minimum time slot interval and coefficient Determine the effective time of the second downlink scheduling mode on the second downlink BWP
  • the effective time of the second downlink scheduling mode is not earlier than the first Time slots, that is, the terminal will be no earlier than the time slot on the second downlink BWP Use the second downlink scheduling mode.
  • Case 5 The terminal switches from the first downlink scheduling mode to the second downlink scheduling mode, from the first downlink BWP to the second downlink BWP, and from the first uplink scheduling mode to the second uplink scheduling mode, from the first The upstream BWP is switched to the second upstream BWP.
  • the terminal can be based on the time slot N of the PDCCH, the effective minimum time slot interval and the coefficient Determine the effective time of the second downlink scheduling mode on the second downlink BWP, and according to the time slot N where the PDCCH is located, the effective minimum time slot interval and the coefficient Determine the effective time of the second uplink scheduling mode on the second uplink BWP.
  • the effective time of the second downlink scheduling mode and the effective time of the second uplink scheduling mode can be determined by referring to the procedures described in Case 1 and Case 2, which will not be repeated.
  • the terminal may be located in a frequency division duplex (FDD) system, and in case 5, the terminal may be located in a time division duplex (TDD) system.
  • FDD frequency division duplex
  • TDD time division duplex
  • the uplink BWP and the downlink BWP are switched in pairs.
  • the downlink BWP must be switched, that is, at the same time, if the uplink BWP is switched, the downlink BWP must also be switched.
  • uplink BWP and downlink BWP switching are decoupled. At the same time, uplink BWP switching or downlink BWP switching can be performed.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit the content indicated by the network device to the terminal.
  • the switching instruction sent by the network device to the terminal may also be used to indicate one or more of the following Parameters: terminal PDCCH skipping (skipping), terminal monitoring PDCCH cycle, terminal's multi-input multi-out (MIMO) parameters, terminal monitoring search space and /CORESET, etc., terminal receives network equipment After the indicated one or more parameters, the effective time of these parameters can be determined, and these parameters can be used when the determined effective time arrives.
  • the effective time of the aforementioned one or more parameters may be the same as the effective time of the second scheduling mode.
  • the effective time of one or more of the above parameters can be no earlier than the N+max (1, minimum K0 value) time slot, and N is the terminal receiving the handover instruction including The time slot where the PDCCH is located.
  • PDCCH skipping may refer to a PDCCH where the terminal skips one or more time slots/subframes/monitor occasions (monitor occasion, MO) to monitor scheduling data.
  • MO time slots/subframes/monitor occasions
  • the period during which the terminal monitors the PDCCH may refer to the period during which the terminal monitors the PDCCH for scheduling data.
  • the MIMO parameter of the terminal may refer to the number of antennas (antennas), or the number of antenna ports (antenna ports), or the number of transmission layers (layers), or the maximum number of transmission layers for the terminal to transmit/receive.
  • the search space (search space) and /CORESET monitored by the terminal may refer to the CORESET and/or search space required to be monitored by the PDCCH of the terminal monitoring scheduling data.
  • the network device may indicate the minimum time slot interval on the BWP to the terminal, so that the terminal can schedule the data channel according to the instruction of the network device.
  • the process may include:
  • the terminal receives the minimum time slot interval indication information sent by the network equipment.
  • the minimum time slot interval indication information is used to indicate the minimum time slot interval of the target BWP; the terminal determines the minimum time slot of the target BWP according to the minimum time slot interval indication information and the numerology of the target BWP Slot interval, the minimum slot interval of the target BWP is based on the numerology of the target BWP.
  • the target BWP can be an uplink BWP or a downlink BWP, which is not limited.
  • the target BWP may be an uplink BWP or a downlink BWP activated when the terminal receives the minimum time slot interval indication information, or may be an uplink BWP or a downlink BWP to which the terminal is to be switched.
  • the minimum time slot interval of the target BWP may refer to the time slot interval between the time slot where the PDCCH is located and the time slot where the data channel scheduled by the PDCCH on the target BWP is located.
  • the minimum time slot interval of the target BWP is the time slot interval between the time slot where the PDCCH is located and the time slot where the uplink data channel scheduled by the PDCCH on the uplink BWP is located.
  • the target BWP is a downlink BWP
  • the minimum time slot interval of the target BWP is the time slot interval between the time slot where the PDCCH is located and the time slot where the downlink data channel scheduled by the PDCCH on the downlink BWP is located.
  • the minimum time slot interval of the target BWP is based on the numerology of the target BWP can also be described as the minimum time slot interval of the target BWP corresponds to the numerology of the target BWP, or the minimum time slot interval of the target BWP is associated with the numerology of the target BWP, or,
  • the minimum time slot interval of the target BWP is related to the numerology of the target BWP, or the minimum time slot interval of the target BWP is based on the numerology of the target BWP, and so on.
  • the minimum time slot interval of the target BWP finally determined by the terminal may refer to the time length between the time slot where the PDCCH on the target BWP is located and the time slot where the data channel scheduled by the PDCCH is located, and the minimum time slot interval of the target BWP finally determined by the terminal
  • the unit of can be ms.
  • the minimum time slot interval indication information includes the value corresponding to the minimum time slot interval of the target BWP, that is, the network device can directly indicate the value of the minimum time slot interval to the terminal, so that the terminal can directly according to the minimum time slot interval of the target BWP.
  • the value of the small slot interval and the numerology of the target BWP determine the minimum slot interval of the target BWP.
  • the value of the minimum time slot interval of the target BWP may refer to the number of time slots between the time slot where the PDCCH is located on the target BWP and the time slot where the data channel scheduled by the PDCCH is located.
  • the network device may indicate the minimum K0 value to the terminal, and when the target BWP is an uplink BWP, the network device may indicate the minimum K2 value to the terminal.
  • the embodiment of the present application is not limited to indicating the minimum time slot interval of the target BWP through the K0 value or the K2 value, but may also indirectly indicate the minimum time slot interval of the BWP through other methods. Specifically, for other methods, refer to the following One possible design is described in.
  • the minimum time slot interval indication information includes a reference value corresponding to the minimum time slot interval; the terminal determines the minimum time slot interval of the target BWP according to the minimum time slot interval indication information and the numerology of the target BWP, including: terminal Determine the minimum time slot interval of the target BWP according to the value corresponding to the reference minimum time slot interval, the reference numerology and the numerology of the target BWP.
  • the value corresponding to the reference minimum time slot interval can be the value of the minimum time slot interval corresponding to the reference numerology, or it can be described as the value corresponding to the reference minimum time slot interval as the value of the minimum time slot interval corresponding to the reference BWP. value.
  • the value of the reference minimum time slot interval may be the reference minimum K0 value
  • the value of the reference minimum time slot interval may be the minimum K2 value.
  • the terminal may refer to the value and coefficient corresponding to the minimum slot interval Determine the number of time slots between the time slot of the PDCCH on the target BWP and the time slot of the data channel scheduled by the PDCCH, and then according to the interval between the time slot of the PDCCH on the target BWP and the time slot of the data channel scheduled by the PDCCH.
  • the number of time slots and the numerology of the target BWP determine the interval between the time slot where the PDCCH is located on the target BWP and the time slot where the data channel scheduled by the PDCCH is located.
  • ⁇ target is the numerology of the target BWP
  • ⁇ reference is the reference numerology
  • the reference numerology is 1
  • the target BWP numerology is 0, then the minimum time slot interval of the target BWP is Since the numerology of the target BWP is 0 and the previous time slot of the target BWP is 1 ms, the minimum time slot interval of the target BWP is 1 ms.
  • the minimum time slot interval indication information includes a first index value
  • the terminal determines the minimum time slot interval of the target BWP according to the minimum time slot interval indication information and the numerology of the target BWP, including: the terminal according to the first index The value, the first correspondence and the numerology of the target BWP determine the minimum time slot interval of the target BWP.
  • the terminal can first determine the number of time slots corresponding to the minimum time slot interval of the target BWP according to the first index value and the first corresponding relationship, and then determine the number of time slots corresponding to the minimum time slot interval of the target BWP and the numerology of the target BWP The duration corresponding to the minimum slot interval of the target BWP.
  • the first correspondence relationship includes the correspondence relationship between the index value and the minimum time slot interval of the BWP.
  • the minimum time slot interval included in the first correspondence relationship may be the minimum time slot interval of the downlink BWP or the minimum time slot interval of the uplink BWP, which is not limited.
  • the minimum time slot interval of the BWP included in the first correspondence may be the minimum K0 value of the downlink BWP, or the minimum K2 value of the uplink BWP.
  • the first correspondence relationship may be a correspondence relationship in the form of an array or a correspondence relationship in the form of a list.
  • the first corresponding relationship can be an array: index value 0 ⁇ the minimum K0 value of BWP1 is 0, the minimum K0 value of BWP2 is 0 ⁇ , the index value 1 ⁇ the minimum K0 value of BWP1 is 2, and the minimum K0 value of BWP2 is 1 ⁇ , or, the first corresponding relationship is shown in Table 3 below, which is not limited.
  • the minimum time slot interval of the BWP in the first correspondence relationship is the minimum K0 value of the downlink BWP, as shown in Table 3 below, when the index value is 0, the corresponding The minimum K0 value of DL BWP1 is 0, and the minimum K0 value of the corresponding DL BWP2 is 0; when the index value is 1, the minimum K0 value of the corresponding DL BWP1 is 2, and the minimum K0 value of the corresponding DL BWP2 is 1; the index value When it is 2, the minimum K0 value of the corresponding DL BWP1 is 3, and the minimum K0 value of the corresponding DL BWP2 is 2.
  • the target BWP is DL BWP2
  • the numerology of DL BWP2 is 1
  • the length of the last time slot of DL BWP2 is 0.5 ms
  • the first index value included in the minimum time slot interval indication information is 1, then index value 1 is used as the index, and the query table 3.
  • the minimum time slot interval of the BWP in the first correspondence relationship is the minimum K2 value of the uplink BWP, as shown in Table 4 below, when the index value is 0, the corresponding The minimum K2 value of UL BWP1 is 1, and the minimum K2 value of the corresponding UL BWP2 is 2.
  • the index value is 1
  • the minimum K2 value of the corresponding UL BWP1 is 2
  • the minimum K2 value of the corresponding UL BWP2 is 3.
  • the target BWP is UL BWP2
  • the numerology of UL BWP2 is 1
  • the last time slot length of UL BWP2 is 0.5 ms
  • Table 3 and Table 4 are only exemplary tables.
  • Table 3 may also include other one or more minimum values of BWP.
  • Table 3 can be split into two tables, and each table only includes the corresponding relationship between the index value and the minimum K0 value of a BWP, which is not limited.
  • Table 4 may also include one or more minimum values of BWP.
  • Table 4 can be split into two tables, and each table only includes the corresponding relationship between the index value and the minimum K0 value of a BWP, which is not limited.
  • the minimum time slot interval indication information includes the second index value; the terminal determines the minimum time slot interval of the target BWP according to the minimum time slot interval indication information and the numerology of the target BWP, including:
  • the terminal determines the minimum time slot interval of the target BWP according to the second index value, the second correspondence, the reference numerology and the numerology of the target BWP.
  • the terminal may first determine the reference minimum time slot interval according to the second index value and the second corresponding relationship, and then compare the reference minimum time slot interval with Determine the number of time slots corresponding to the minimum time slot interval of the target BWP, and then determine the duration corresponding to the minimum time slot interval on the target BWP according to the number of time slots corresponding to the minimum time slot interval of the target BWP and the numerology of the target BWP.
  • ⁇ target is the numerology of the target BWP
  • ⁇ reference is the reference numerology.
  • the second correspondence relationship includes the correspondence relationship between the index value and the reference minimum time slot interval.
  • Reference minimum time slot interval As mentioned above, when the target BWP is a downlink BWP, the reference numerology can be the numerology of a reference DL BWP, and the reference minimum time slot interval can be the reference minimum K0 value. When the target BWP is an uplink BWP, the reference numerology can be a numerology of a certain reference UL BWP, and the reference minimum time slot interval can be the reference minimum K2 value.
  • the second correspondence relationship may be a correspondence relationship in the form of an array or a correspondence relationship in the form of a list.
  • the second correspondence can be an array: ⁇ index value 0, the reference minimum K0 value is 0 ⁇ , ⁇ index value 1, the reference minimum K0 value is 1 ⁇ , etc., or the second correspondence is shown in Table 5 below , No restrictions.
  • the reference minimum time slot interval as the reference minimum K0 value, and the target BWP is DL BWP as an example, as shown in Table 5 below, when the index value is 0, the corresponding reference The minimum K0 value is 0, when the index value is 1, the minimum K0 value of the corresponding reference is 1, and when the index value is 2, the minimum K0 value of the corresponding reference is 2.
  • the index value 2 is Index, look up Table 5, determine that the minimum K0 value for reference is 2, and the minimum time slot interval of DL BWP1 is Since the last time slot of DL BWP1 is 1ms, the minimum time slot interval of BWP1 is 1ms.
  • the index value 1 is Index, look up Table 6, determine that the minimum K2 value for reference is 2, and the minimum time slot interval of UL BWP1 is Since the last time slot of UL BWP1 is 1ms, the minimum time slot interval of BWP1 is 1ms.
  • the BWP of the terminal is switched, and the numerology of the BWP is different before and after the switching, but the scheduling mode of the terminal is not switched.
  • the BWP after the switching is different.
  • the numerology is different from the numerology of the BWP before the handover.
  • the length of a time slot on the BWP after the handover is different from that of the BWP before the handover.
  • the minimum time slot interval on the BWP before the handover is not applicable to the BWP after the handover.
  • this application also provides the following method for determining the minimum time slot interval of the BWP after the switch. Specifically, the method may include:
  • the terminal receives the handover instruction sent by the network device; where the handover instruction is used to instruct the terminal to switch from the first BWP to the second BWP; the terminal according to the minimum time slot interval on the first BWP, the numerology of the first BWP, and the second BWP The numerology determines the minimum slot interval on the second BWP.
  • the first BWP may be the first downlink BWP, and the second BWP may be the second downlink BWP; or, the first BWP is the first uplink BWP, and the second BWP is the second uplink BWP, which is not limited.
  • the minimum time slot interval on the second BWP is the minimum K0 value on the downlink BWP.
  • the minimum time slot interval on the second BWP is that of the uplink BWP. The minimum K2 value.
  • the terminal determines the minimum time slot interval on the second BWP according to the minimum time slot interval on the first BWP, the numerology of the first BWP, and the numerology of the second BWP, which may include: The minimum time slot interval and the first coefficient determine the minimum time slot interval on the second BWP.
  • the terminal may determine the product of the minimum time slot interval on the first BWP and the first coefficient as the minimum time slot interval on the second BWP.
  • the first coefficient is determined according to the numerology of the second BWP and the numerology of the first BWP.
  • the first coefficient is equal to Where ⁇ 2 is the numerology of the second BWP, and ⁇ 1 is the numerology of the first BWP.
  • the minimum K0 value when the network device instructs the terminal to switch from the first downlink BWP to the second downlink BWP, the minimum K0 value will change, and the new minimum K0 value may be: Among them, K0 min,new is the new minimum K0 value, K0 min,old is the minimum K0 value that takes effect when the terminal receives the handover instruction, Is the numerology of the second downstream BWP, It is the numerology of the first downstream BWP.
  • the minimum K2 value will change, and the new minimum K2 value can be:
  • K2 min new is the new minimum K2 value
  • K2 min old is the minimum K2 value that takes effect when the terminal receives the handover instruction
  • each node such as a terminal and a network device, includes a hardware structure and/or software module corresponding to each function.
  • the present application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a certain function is executed by hardware or computer software-driven hardware depends on the specific application and design constraint conditions of the technical solution. Professionals and technicians can use different methods for each specific application to implement the described functions, but such implementation should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
  • the embodiment of the present application can divide the first device and the second device into functional modules according to the above method examples.
  • each functional module can be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions can be integrated into one processing module.
  • the above-mentioned integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or software functional modules. It should be noted that the division of modules in the embodiments of the present application is illustrative, and is only a logical function division, and there may be other division methods in actual implementation.
  • FIG. 12 shows a structural diagram of a communication device 120.
  • the communication device 120 may be a terminal, or a chip in the terminal, or a system-on-chip.
  • the communication device 120 may be used to perform the functions of the terminal involved in the foregoing embodiments.
  • the communication device 120 shown in FIG. 12 includes: a receiving unit 1201 and a determining unit 1202;
  • the receiving unit 1201 is configured to receive a switching instruction sent by a network device for instructing the terminal to switch from the first scheduling mode to the second scheduling mode.
  • the receiving unit 1201 is used to support the communication device 120 to perform step 501.
  • the determining unit 1202 is configured to determine the effective time of the second scheduling mode.
  • the determining unit 1202 is configured to support the communication device 120 to perform step 502.
  • the effective time of the second scheduling mode can be determined with reference to the method 1 to the method 7 described in the foregoing method embodiment, and details are not described herein again.
  • the determining unit 1202 may refer to the above-mentioned case 1 to case 5 to determine the effective time of the second scheduling mode, which will not be repeated.
  • the receiving unit 1201 is configured to receive the minimum time slot interval indication information sent by the network device, and the minimum time slot interval indication information is used to indicate the minimum time slot interval of the target BWP;
  • the determining unit 1202 is used for the terminal to determine the minimum time slot interval of the target BWP according to the minimum time slot interval indication information and the numerology of the target BWP, and the minimum time slot interval of the target BWP is based on the numerology of the target BWP.
  • the network device can indicate the minimum time slot interval on the BWP to the terminal, so that the terminal can schedule the data channel according to the instruction of the network device.
  • the minimum time slot interval indication information for several possible designs, reference may be made to the above method embodiments, and details are not repeated.
  • the receiving unit 1201 when the BWP of the terminal is switched, the numerology of the BWP is different before and after the switch, but the scheduling mode of the terminal does not switch, the receiving unit 1201 is used to receive the switching instruction sent by the network device ; Wherein, the handover indication is used to indicate the terminal is switched from the first BWP to the second BWP;
  • the determining unit 1202 is configured to determine the minimum time slot interval on the second BWP according to the minimum time slot interval on the first BWP, the numerology of the first BWP, and the numerology of the second BWP.
  • the communication device 120 shown in FIG. 12 includes: a processing module and a communication module.
  • the processing module is used to control and manage the actions of the communication device 120.
  • the processing module can integrate the functions of the determining unit 1202 and can be used to support the communication device 120 to perform step 502 and other processes of the technology described herein.
  • the communication module can integrate the functions of the receiving unit 1201, and can be used to support the communication device 120 to perform step 501 and communicate with other network entities, such as the communication with the functional module or network entities shown in FIG. 2.
  • the communication device 120 may also include a storage module for storing program codes and data of the communication device 120.
  • the processing module may be a processor or a controller. It can implement or execute various exemplary logical blocks, modules and circuits described in conjunction with the disclosure of this application.
  • the processor may also be a combination of computing functions, for example, a combination of one or more microprocessors, a combination of a DSP and a microprocessor, and so on.
  • the communication module can be a transceiver circuit or a communication interface.
  • the storage module may be a memory. When the processing module is a processor, the communication module is a communication interface, and the storage module is a memory, the communication device 120 involved in the embodiment of the present application may be the communication device shown in FIG. 4.
  • Fig. 13 is a structural diagram of a scheduling switching system provided by an embodiment of the application. As shown in Fig. 13, the communication system may include: multiple terminals 130 and network devices.
  • the terminal 130 has a similar function to the communication device 120 shown in FIG. 12, and can be used to receive a switching instruction sent by a network device for instructing the terminal 130 to switch from the first scheduling mode to the second scheduling mode, and determine the second scheduling The effective time of the method.
  • the terminal 130 can determine the effective time of the second scheduling mode with reference to the foregoing Manner 1 to Manner 7, which will not be repeated. Or, in the case of the BWP handover of the terminal, the terminal 130 determines the effective time of the second scheduling mode with reference to the above-mentioned case 1 to case 5, which will not be repeated.
  • the terminal 130 is used to receive the minimum time slot interval indication information sent by the network device, and the minimum time slot interval indication information is used to indicate the minimum time slot interval of the target BWP, according to the minimum time slot interval indication information and
  • the numerology of the target BWP determines the minimum time slot interval of the target BWP, and the minimum time slot interval of the target BWP is based on the numerology of the target BWP.
  • the network device can indicate the minimum time slot interval on the BWP to the terminal, so that the terminal can schedule the data channel according to the instruction of the network device.
  • the minimum time slot interval indication information for several possible designs, reference may be made to the above method embodiments, and details are not repeated.
  • the terminal 130 when the BWP of the terminal is switched, the numerology of the BWP is different before and after the switching, but the scheduling mode of the terminal is not switched, the terminal 130 is used to receive the switching instruction sent by the network device, According to the minimum time slot interval on the first BWP, the numerology of the first BWP, and the numerology of the second BWP, the minimum time slot interval on the second BWP is determined; the handover indication is used to indicate that the terminal is switched from the first BWP to Second BWP;
  • the terminal 130 can receive a switching instruction from the network device for instructing the terminal to switch from the first scheduling mode to the second scheduling mode, and after receiving the switching instruction, clarify the scheduling mode after the switching. Effective time, so that when the effective time of the second scheduling mode comes, the terminal 130 uses the second scheduling mode to schedule the data channel and/trigger the reference signal, especially when the second scheduling mode is cross-slot scheduling, turn off its own radio module Enter the energy-saving state.
  • the disclosed device and method may be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative.
  • the division of the modules or units is only a logical function division.
  • there may be other division methods for example, multiple units or components may be It can be combined or integrated into another device, or some features can be omitted or not implemented.
  • the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate parts may or may not be physically separate, and the parts displayed as a unit may be one physical unit or multiple physical units, which can be located in one place or distributed to multiple different places . Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the solutions of the embodiments.
  • each unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the above-mentioned integrated unit can be implemented in the form of hardware or software functional unit.
  • the integrated unit is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a readable storage medium.
  • the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application are essentially or the part that contributes to the prior art, or all or part of the technical solutions can be embodied in the form of software products, which are stored in a storage medium.
  • a device which may be a single-chip microcomputer, a chip, etc.
  • a processor processor
  • the aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, ROM, RAM, magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program codes.

Abstract

本申请实施例公开一种调度切换方法及装置，以指示切换终端的调度方式，以及明确调度方式的生效时间。所述方法包括：终端接收网络设备发送的用于指示终端从第一调度方式切换到第二调度方式的切换指示，并确定第二调度方式的生效时间，以便在第二调度方式的生效时间到来之时采用第二调度方式调度数据信道和/或触发参考信号的时间。

Description

一种调度切换方法及装置
本申请要求在2019年04月30日提交国家知识产权局、申请号为201910364535.X、申请名称为“一种跨时隙调度的切换方法”的中国专利申请的优先权，在2019年06月10日提交国家知识产权局、申请号为201910498052.9、申请名称为“一种调度切换方法及装置”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本申请实施例涉及通信技术领域，尤其涉及一种调度切换方法及装置。
背景技术
在第三代移动通信标准化组织(3rd generation partnership project，3GPP)规定的Rel-15中，基站调度终端的数据信道时，基站首先会发送一个调度信息，通过该调度信息调度终端的数据信道(如：通过物理下行控制信道(physical downlink control channel，PDCCH)发送的物理下行控制信道(physical downlink shared channel，PDSCH)的调度信息调度终端的PDSCH，或者，通过PDCCH发送的物理下行控制信道(physical downlink shared channel，PUSCH)的调度信息调度终端的PUSCH)，该调度信息可以指示数据信道的传输参数，如：数据信道的时域资源位置等，终端可以根据调度信息的指示，在数据信道的时域资源位置接收数据信道。
其中，上述调度过程可以根据PDCCH与数据信道的时域位置关系分为下述两种调度方式：同时隙调度(single slot scheduling)，PDCCH与数据信道位于同一时隙；跨时隙调度(cross-slot scheduling)，数据信道与PDCCH位于不同时隙，如：终端可以在PDCCH所占用时隙的下一时隙接收数据信道等。
为降低终端的功耗，保证良好的用户体验，第三代移动通信标准化组织(3rd generation partnership project，3GPP)在Rel-16中对终端功耗节省课题进行了立项，讨论通过动态切换调度方式来降低终端的功耗，如：在同时隙调度时，终端需要实时开启终端的射频模块，以保证数据信道的顺利传输。而在跨时隙调度时，终端在数据信道传输数据之前，可以关闭终端的射频模块，以降低终端的功耗，实现终端节能的效果。但是，具体的，如何指示终端的调度方式以及调度方式的生效时间并未讨论。
发明内容
本申请实施例提供一种调度切换方法及装置，以指示切换终端的调度方式，以及明确调度方式的生效时间。
为达到上述目的，本申请实施例采用如下技术方案：
第一方面，本申请实施例提供一种调度切换方法，终端接收网络设备发送的用于指示终端从第一调度方式切换到第二调度方式的切换指示，确定第二调度方式的生效时间，以便终端在第二调度方式的生效时间到来之时采用第二调度方式调度数据信道和/或触发参考信号的时间。
其中，切换指示可以包括最小K0值、最小K2值、最小非周期CSI-RS触发偏移值，最小非周期SRS触发偏移值中的一种或多种取值；或者，切换指示可以包括一个或者 多个索引值，该索引值可以用于指示最小K0值或者最小K2值或者最小非周期CSI-RS触发偏移值或者最小非周期SRS触发偏移值。K0值为PDCCH所在的时隙与其调度的PDSCH所在的时隙之间的时隙差；K2值为PDCCH所在的时隙与其调度的PUSCH所在的时隙之间的时隙差；非周期CSI-RS触发偏移值为PDCCH所在的时隙与其触发的非周期CSI-RS所在的时隙之间的时隙差；非周期SRS触发偏移值为PDCCH所在的时隙与其触发的非周期SRS所在的时隙之间的时隙差。
其中，第一调度方式与第二调度方式不同，第一调度方式为同时隙调度，第二调度方式为跨时隙调度；或者，第一调度方式为跨时隙调度，第二调度方式为同时隙调度，或者，第一调度方式、第二调度方式均为跨时隙调度，但是第一调度方式下PDCCH占用的时隙与PDCCH调度的数据信道占用的时隙之间的时隙差与第一调度方式下PDCCH占用的时隙与PDCCH调度的数据信道占用的时隙之间的时隙差不同。同时隙调度下，为保证数据信道和/或参考信号传输的可靠性，终端需要一直开启自身的射频模块以缓存数据信道和/或参考信令。而跨时隙调度下，终端可以暂时关闭自身的射频模块以实现节能的目的。
基于第一方面所述的方法，终端可以接收网络设备发送的用于指示切换终端的调度方式的切换指示，并在接收到切换指示后，确定切换后的调度方式的生效时间，以便终端在切换后的调度方式的生效时间到来时，采用该调度方式调度数据信道和/触发参考信号，尤其是在切换后的调度方式为跨时隙调度时，关闭自身的射频模块进入节能状态。
在第一方面的第一种可能的设计中，结合第一方面，切换指示包括在PDCCH中，第二调度方式的生效时间为：PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的最后一个符号的下一符号；或者，PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的时隙的下一时隙；或者，PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机；其中，PDCCH的反馈信息用于指示终端是否正确接收到PDCCH；调度信息监测时机为终端监测用于调度数据信道的PDCCH的时机。
其中，PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的最后一个符号的下一符号可以为与PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的最后一个符号相邻的符号，也可以为PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的最后一个符号之后的任意符号，本申请对此不予限制。
其中，PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的时隙的下一时隙可以为与PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的时隙之后，与PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的时隙相邻的时隙，也可以为PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的时隙之后的任意时隙。
其中，PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机可以为PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的时域位置之后、第一次出现的调度信息监测时机，也可以为PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的时域位置之后其他任意调度信息监测时机。
基于该可能的设计，可以在PDCCH的反馈信息发送之后生效第二调度方式，如此，可以保证终端接收包括切换指示的PDCCH的可靠性或者准确性。
在第一方面的第二种可能的设计中，结合第一方面，切换指示包括在PDCCH中，PDCCH用于调度终端的下行数据信道；第二调度方式的生效时间为：下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的最后一个符号的下一个符号；或者，下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时隙的下一时隙；或者，下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机；其中，数据信道的反馈信息用于指示终端是否接收到数据信道；调度信息监测时机为终端监测用于调度数据信道的PDCCH的时机。
其中，下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的最后一个符号的下一符号可以为与下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的最后一个符号相邻的符号，也可以为下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的最后一个符号之后的任意符号。
其中，下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时隙的下一时隙可以为与下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时隙之后，与下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时隙相邻的时隙，也可以为下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时隙之后的任意时隙。
其中，下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机可以为下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时域位置之后、第一次出现的调度信息监测时机，也可以为下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时域位置之后其他任意调度信息监测时机，如：可以为下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时域位置之后第N个调度信息监测时机。
基于该可能的设计，可以在包括切换指示的PDCCH所调度的下行数据信道的反馈信息传输完成之后，才生效第二调度方式，如此，可以保证终端接收包括切换指示的PDCCH所调度的下行数据信道的可靠性或者准确性。
在第一方面的第三种可能的设计中，切换指示包括在PDCCH中，PDCCH用于调度终端的上行数据信道；第二调度方式的生效时间为：上行数据信道所占用的最后一个符号的下一个符号；或者，上行数据信道所占用的时隙的下一时隙；或者，上行数据信道所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机；其中，调度信息监测时机为终端监测用于调度数据信道的PDCCH的时机。
其中，上行数据信道所占用的最后一个符号的下一符号可以为与上行数据信道所占用的最后一个符号相邻的符号，也可以为上行数据信道所占用的最后一个符号之后的任意符号。
其中，上行数据信道所占用的时隙的下一时隙可以为与上行数据信道所占用的时隙之后，与上行数据信道所占用的时隙相邻的时隙，也可以为上行数据信道所占用的时隙之后的任意时隙。
其中，上行数据信道所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机可以为上行数据信道所占用的时域位置之后、第一次出现的调度信息监测时机，也可以为上行数据信道所占用的时域位置之后其他任意调度信息监测时机。
基于该可能的设计，可以在包括切换指示的PDCCH所调度的上行数据信道传输完成之后，才生效第二调度方式，如此，可以保证终端顺利地发送包括切换指示的PDCCH所调度的上行数据信道的可靠性或者准确性。
在第一方面的第四种可能的设计中，结合第一方面，切换指示包括在PDCCH中，PDCCH位于第N个时隙，N为整数；第二调度方式的生效时间为：第N+M个时隙，或者，不早于第N+M个时隙的第一个调度信息监测时机；其中，M根据终端接收切换指示时生效的时隙差的最小值确定，时隙差指调度数据信道的PDCCH所占用的时隙与调度数据信道的PDCCH调度的数据信道所占用的时隙之间的时隙差。
其中，M等于最小值；或者，M等于最小值与第一数值之和；或者，M为第二数值与最小值中的最大值。
基于该可能的设计，可以依据包括切换指示的PDCCH所占用的时隙以及终端处理PDCCH的能力确定第二调度方式的生效时间，尽可能保证终端在解析完包括切换指示的 PDCCH之后生效第二调度方式。
在第一方面的第五种可能的设计中，结合第一方面的第四种可能的设计，切换指示包括在MAC CE中，MAC CE包括在PDSCH中；第二调度方式的生效时间在PDSCH的反馈信息所占用的时隙之后，且第二调度方式的生效时间与PDSCH的反馈信息所占用的时隙间隔第一时长；其中，PDSCH的反馈信息用于指示终端是否正确接收到PDSCH。
其中，第一时长与终端的物理层接收PDSCH，并向上传递到终端的MAC层的时间有关。
基于该可能的设计，可以在终端从PDSCH中获取到包括切换指示的MAC CE之后生效第二调度方式，如此，可以保证终端接收包括切换指示的MAC CE的可靠性或者准确性。
在第一方面的第六种可能的设计中，结合第一方面，所述方法还包括：终端接收生效指示，生效指示用于指示第二调度方式的生效时间；终端确定第二调度方式的生效时间，包括：终端根据生效指示，确定第二调度方式的生效时间。
基于该可能的设计，可以由网络设备直接将第二调度方式的生效时间指示给终端，以便终端根据网络设备的指示确定第二调度方式的生效时间，简单易行。
在第一方面的第七种可能的设计中，结合在第一方面的第六种可能的设计，生效指示包括在PDCCH或者PDSCH中，如：生效指示可以包括在PDCCH中的DCI中，或者，生效指示包括在PDSCH中的MAC CE中。
基于该可能的设计，网络设备可以通过PDCCH或者PDSCH向终端指示第二调度方式的生效时间，指示方式灵活多样。
在第一方面的第八种可能的设计中，结合在第一方面，第二调度方式的生效时间为：第一调度信息调度的数据信道占用的最后一个符号的下一符号；或者，第一调度信息调度的数据信道占用的时隙的下一时隙；或者，第一调度信息调度的数据信道占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机；其中，第一调度信息的时域位置不晚于切换指示所占用的时域位置，调度信息监测时机为终端监测用于调度数据信道的PDCCH的时机。
其中，第一调度信息调度的数据信道所占用的最后一个符号的下一符号可以为与第一调度信息调度的数据信道所占用的最后一个符号相邻的符号，也可以为第一调度信息调度的数据信道所占用的最后一个符号之后的任意符号。
其中，第一调度信息调度的数据信道所占用的时隙的下一时隙可以为与第一调度信息调度的数据信道所占用的时隙之后，与第一调度信息调度的数据信道所占用的时隙相邻的时隙，也可以为第一调度信息调度的数据信道所占用的时隙之后的任意时隙。
其中，第一调度信息调度的数据信道所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机可以为第一调度信息调度的数据信道所占用的时域位置之后、第一次出现的调度信息监测时机，也可以为第一调度信息调度的数据信道所占用的时域位置之后其他任意调度信息监测时机，如：为第一调度信息调度的数据信道所占用的时域位置之后第N个调度信息监测时机，N为正整数。
基于该可能的设计，可以在不晚于切换指示的调度信息所调度数据信道传输完成之后才生效第二调度方式，保证数据信道传输的可靠性和准确性。
在第一方面的第九种可能的设计中，结合在第一方面，切换指示包括在PDCCH中，第二调度方式的生效时间为：第一调度信息调度的下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的最后 一个符号的下一符号；或者，第一调度信息调度的下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时隙的下一时隙；或者，第一调度信息调度的下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机；其中，第一调度信息的时域位置不晚于切换指示所占用的时域位置，调度信息监测时机为终端开始监测PDCCH的时机。
其中，第一调度信息调度的下行数据信道的反馈信号所占用的最后一个符号的下一符号可以为与第一调度信息调度的下行数据信道的反馈信号所占用的最后一个符号相邻的符号，也可以为第一调度信息调度的下行数据信道的反馈信号所占用的最后一个符号之后的任意符号。
其中，第一调度信息调度的下行数据信道的反馈信号所占用的时隙的下一时隙可以为与第一调度信息调度的下行数据信道的反馈信号所占用的时隙之后，与第一调度信息调度的下行数据信道的反馈信号所占用的时隙相邻的时隙，也可以为第一调度信息调度的下行数据信道的反馈信号所占用的时隙之后的任意时隙。
其中，第一调度信息调度的下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机可以为第一调度信息调度的下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时域位置之后、第一次出现的调度信息监测时机，也可以为第一调度信息调度的下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时域位置之后其他任意调度信息监测时机。
基于该可能的设计，可以在不晚于切换指示的调度信息所调度下行数据信道对应的反馈信息传输完成之后才生效第二调度方式，如此，保证下行数据信道传输的可靠性。
在第一方面的第十种可能的设计中，结合在第一方面的第八种可能设计或者第一方面的第七种可能的设计，第一调度信息为不晚于切换指示的所有调度信息中，调度的数据信道是最晚传输的数据信道的调度信息。
基于该可能的设计，可以在不晚于切换指示的调度信息所调度的数据信道全部传输完成之后，才生效第二调度方式，如此，保证不晚于切换指示的所有调度的可靠性。
在第一方面的第十一种可能的设计中，结合在第一方面或者第一方面的任一种可能的设计，第一调度方式、第二调度方式由以下至少一项参数指示：生效的最小K0值，生效的最小K2值，生效的最小非周期CSI-RS触发偏移值，生效的最小非周期SRS触发偏移值；其中，K0值为PDCCH所在的时隙与其调度的PDSCH所在的时隙之间的时隙差；K2值为PDCCH所在的时隙与其调度的PUSCH所在的时隙之间的时隙差；非周期CSI-RS触发偏移值为PDCCH所在的时隙与其触发的非周期CSI-RS所在的时隙之间的时隙差；非周期SRS触发偏移值为PDCCH所在的时隙与其触发的非周期SRS所在的时隙之间的时隙差。
基于该可能的设计，可以由生效的最小K0值，生效的最小K2值，生效的最小非周期CSI-RS触发偏移值，生效的最小非周期SRS触发偏移值中任一数值指示终端的调度方式，简单易行。
又一种可能的设计中，结合第一方面或者第一方面的任一种可能的设计，切换指示包括在PDCCH中，切换指示还用于指示终端从第一BWP切换到第二BWP；终端确定第二调度方式的生效时间，包括：终端根据PDCCH所在时隙N、生效的最小时隙间隔以及目标系数，确定在目标BWP上，第二调度方式的生效时间；其中，N为自然数，目标系数根据目标BWP的系统参数numerology与第一下行BWP的numerology确定，第一下行BWP为终端接收切换指示时激活的下行BWP。
基于该可能的设计，在终端的BWP的切换情况下，根据终端切换后的BWP的系统参数与终端当前激活的下行BWP的系统参数确定第二调度方式的生效时间，避免BWP的系统参数不同，即终端的BWP的子载波间隔变化时，调度方式的生效时间发生变化的问题。
又一种可能的设计中，结合第一方面或者第一方面的任一可能的设计，第二调度方式的生效时间不早于第Q个时隙；Q等于
Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-000001
其中，M等于生效的最小时隙间隔；或者，M等于生效的最小时隙间隔与第一数值之和；或者，M为第二数值与生效的最小时隙间隔中的最大值。
基于该可能的设计，可以在目标BWP上，基于最小调度时隙间隔在终端接收切换指示的时隙之后的第Q个时隙生效第二调度方式，至少保证终端完整地解析出包括切换指示的PDCCH后，再生效第二调度方式，提高了PDCCH接收的准确性。
又一种可能的设计中，结合第一方面或者第一方面的任一可能的设计，第二调度方式的生效时间不早于第Q个时隙，包括：第二调度方式的生效时间为第Q个时隙的起始位置。
基于该可能的设计，可以将第Q个时隙的起始位置作为调度方式的生效时间，即第Q个时隙到来就生效第二调度方式，简单易行。
又一种可能的设计中，结合第一方面或者第一方面的任一可能的设计，目标系数等于
Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-000002
其中μ T为目标BWP的参数numerology，μ 1为第一下行BWP的numerology。
基于该可能的设计，可以直接将BWP的系统参数的比值作为目标系数，简单易行。
又一种可能的设计中，结合第一方面或者第一方面的任一可能的设计，第一BWP为第一下行BWP，第二BWP为第二下行BWP；第一调度方式为第一下行调度方式，第二调度方式为第二下行调度方式；目标BWP为第二下行BWP；或者，第一BWP为第一下行BWP，第二BWP为第二下行BWP；第一调度方式为第一上行调度方式，第二调度方式为第二上行调度方式；目标BWP为第一上行BWP；或者，第一BWP为第一上行BWP，第二BWP为第二上行BWP；第一调度方式为第一下行调度方式，第二调度方式为第二下行调度方式；目标BWP为第一下行BWP；或者，第一BWP为第一上行BWP，第二BWP为第二上行BWP；第一调度方式为第一上行调度方式，第二调度方式为第二上行调度方式；目标BWP为第二上行BWP。
基于该可能的设计，可以在上行调度方式切换以及上行BWP的切换；或者上行调度方式切换以及下行BWP切换；或者，下行调度方式切换以及上行BWP的切换；或者，下行调度方式切换以及下行BWP的切换等多种情况下，执行本申请提供的调度方法，应用场景多样，提高了本申请实施例提供的调度方式的适用性。
又一种可能的设计中，结合第一方面或者第一方面的任一可能的设计，切换指示还用于指示下述一种或者多种参数：终端的PDCCH跳过skipping、终端监测PDCCH的周期、终端的多输入多输出MIMO参数、终端监测的搜索空间和/CORESET；其中，一种或者多种参数的生效时间与第二调度方式的生效时间相同。
基于该可能的设计，在网络设备指示切换调度方式、切换BWP的情况下，指示终端的其他参数信息，并规定其他参数信息的生效时间与调度方式的生效时间相同，简单易行。
第二方面，本申请提供一种通信装置，该通信装置可以为终端或者终端中的芯片或者片上系统，还可以为终端中用于实现第一方面或第一方面的任一可能的设计所述的方法的功能模块。该通信装置可以实现上述各方面或者各可能的设计中终端所执行的功能，所述 功能可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。所述硬件或软件包括一个或多个上述功能相应的模块。如：该通信装置可以包括：接收单元，确定单元；
接收单元，用于接收网络设备发送的用于指示终端从第一调度方式切换到第二调度方式的切换指示。
确定单元，用于确定第二调度方式的生效时间。
其中，该通信装置的具体实现方式可以参考第一方面或第一方面的任一种可能的设计提供的调度切换方法中终端的行为功能，在此不再重复赘述。因此，该提供的通信装置可以达到与第一方面或者第一方面的任一种可能的设计相同的有益效果。
第三方面，提供了一种通信装置，该通信装置可以为终端或者终端中的芯片或者片上系统。该通信装置可以实现上述各方面或者各可能的设计中终端所执行的功能，所述功能可以通过硬件实现。一种可能的设计中，该通信装置可以包括：处理器和通信接口，处理器可以用于支持通信装置实现上述第一方面或者第一方面的任一种可能的设计中所涉及的功能，例如：处理器可以通过通信接口接收网络设备发送的用于指示终端从第一调度方式切换到第二调度方式的切换指示，并确定第二调度方式的生效时间。在又一种可能的设计中，所述通信装置还可以包括存储器，存储器，用于保存通信装置必要的计算机执行指令和数据。当该通信装置运行时，该处理器执行该存储器存储的该计算机执行指令，以使该通信装置执行如上述第一方面或者第一方面的任一种可能的设计所述的调度切换方法。
第四方面，提供了一种计算机可读存储介质，该计算机可读存储介质可以为可读的非易失性存储介质，该计算机可读存储介质中存储有指令，当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机可以执行上述第一方面或者上述方面的任一种可能的设计所述的调度切换方法。
第五方面，提供了一种包含指令的计算机程序产品，当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机可以执行上述第一方面或者上述方面的任一种可能的设计所述的调度切换方法。
第六方面，提供了一种通信装置，该通信装置可以为终端或者终端中的芯片或者片上系统，该通信装置包括一个或者多个处理器以及和一个或多个存储器。所述一个或多个存储器与所述一个或多个处理器耦合，所述一个或多个存储器用于存储计算机程序代码，所述计算机程序代码包括计算机指令，当所述一个或多个处理器执行所述计算机指令时，使所述通信装置执行如上述第一方面或者第一方面的任一可能的设计所述的调度切换方法。
其中，第三方面至第六方面中任一种设计方式所带来的技术效果可参见上述第一方面或者第一方面的任一种可能的设计所带来的技术效果，不再赘述。
第七方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信系统，包括如第二方面至第六方面中任一方面所述的终端以及网络设备。
第八方面，本申请实施例提供又一种调度方法，所述方法包括：终端接收网络设备发送的最小时隙间隔指示信息，最小时隙间隔指示信息用于指示目标BWP的最小时隙间隔；终端根据最小时隙间隔指示信息以及目标BWP的系统参数numerology，确定目标BWP的最小时隙间隔，目标BWP的最小时隙间隔基于目标BWP的numerology。
基于第八方面，终端可以根据网络设备指示的有关目标BWP的最小时隙间隔的信息，确定目标BWP的最小时隙间隔。需要说明的是，该目标BWP可以为终端切换后的BWP，也可以为终端接收最小时隙间隔指示信息时激活的BWP，不予限制。
一种可能的设计中，结合第八方面，最小时隙间隔指示信息包括目标BWP的最小时隙 间隔对应的数值。基于该可能的设计，可以将与目标BWP关联的最小时隙间隔的取值(value)指示给终端，以便终端直接根据该取值确定目标BWP的最小时间间隔，简单易行。
一种可能的设计中，结合第八方面，最小时隙间隔指示信息包括参考最小时隙间隔对应的数值；终端根据最小时隙间隔指示信息以及目标BWP的numerology，确定目标BWP的最小时隙间隔，包括：终端根据参考最小时隙间隔对应的数值、参考numerology以及目标BWP的numerology，确定目标BWP的最小时隙间隔。
基于该可能的设计，可以将与参考numrology对应的参考最小时隙间隔的取值(value)指示给终端，以便终端间接的根据参考最小时隙间隔的取值以及参考numerology和目标BWP的numerology的比例关系，确定目标BWP的最小时间间隔，简单易行。
一种可能的设计中，结合第八方面，最小时隙间隔指示信息包括第一索引值，终端根据最小时隙间隔指示信息以及目标BWP的numerology，确定目标BWP的最小时隙间隔，包括：终端根据第一索引值、第一对应关系以及目标BWP的numerology，确定目标BWP的最小时隙间隔；其中，第一对应关系包括索引值与目标BWP的最小时隙间隔的对应关系。
基于该可能的设计，可以将与目标BWP的最小时隙间隔的取值(value)对应的索引值指示给终端，以便终端间接的根据该索引值确定最小时隙间隔的取指，根据最小时隙间隔的取值以及参考numerology和目标BWP的numerology的比例关系，确定目标BWP的最小时间间隔，简单易行。
一种可能的设计中，结合第八方面，最小时隙间隔指示信息包括第二索引值；终端根据最小时隙间隔指示信息以及目标BWP的numerology，确定目标BWP的最小时隙间隔，包括：终端根据第二索引值，第二对应关系、参考numerology以及目标BWP的numerology，确定目标BWP的最小时隙间隔；其中，第二对应关系包括索引值与参考最小时隙间隔的对应关系。
基于该可能的设计，可以将与参考最小时隙间隔对应的索引值指示给终端，以便终端间接的根据该索引值确定参考最小时隙间隔，进而根据参考最小时间间隔以及参考numerology和目标BWP的numerology的比例关系，确定目标BWP的最小时间间隔，简单易行，确定目标BWP的最小时间间隔，简单易行。
第九方面，本申请提供一种通信装置，该通信装置可以为终端或者终端中的芯片或者片上系统，还可以为终端中用于实现第八方面或第八方面的任一可能的设计所述的方法的功能模块。该通信装置可以实现上述各方面或者各可能的设计中终端所执行的功能，所述功能可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。所述硬件或软件包括一个或多个上述功能相应的模块。如：该通信装置可以包括：接收单元，确定单元；
接收单元，用于接收网络设备发送的最小时隙间隔指示信息，最小时隙间隔指示信息用于指示目标BWP的最小时隙间隔；
确定单元，用于根据最小时隙间隔指示信息以及目标BWP的系统参数numerology，确定目标BWP的最小时隙间隔，目标BWP的最小时隙间隔基于目标BWP的numerology。
其中，该通信装置的具体实现方式可以参考第八方面或第八方面的任一种可能的设计提供的调度切换方法中终端的行为功能，在此不再重复赘述。因此，该提供的通信装置可以达到与第八方面或者第八方面的任一种可能的设计相同的有益效果。
第十方面，提供了一种通信装置，该通信装置可以为终端或者终端中的芯片或者片上系统。该通信装置可以实现上述各方面或者各可能的设计中终端所执行的功能，所述功能可以通过硬件实现。一种可能的设计中，该通信装置可以包括：处理器和通信接口，处理器可以用于支持通信装置实现上述第八方面或者第八方面的任一种可能的设计中所涉及的功能，例如：处理器可以通过通信接口接收网络设备发送的最小时隙间隔指示信息，最小时隙间隔指示信息用于指示目标BWP的最小时隙间隔，根据最小时隙间隔指示信息以及目标BWP的系统参数numerology，确定目标BWP的最小时隙间隔，目标BWP的最小时隙间隔基于目标BWP的numerology。在又一种可能的设计中，所述通信装置还可以包括存储器，存储器，用于保存通信装置必要的计算机执行指令和数据。当该通信装置运行时，该处理器执行该存储器存储的该计算机执行指令，以使该通信装置执行如上述第八方面或者第八方面的任一种可能的设计所述的调度切换方法。
第十一方面，提供了一种计算机可读存储介质，该计算机可读存储介质可以为可读的非易失性存储介质，该计算机可读存储介质中存储有指令，当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机可以执行上述第八方面或者上述方面的任一种可能的设计所述的调度切换方法。
第十二方面，提供了一种包含指令的计算机程序产品，当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机可以执行上述第八方面或者上述方面的任一种可能的设计所述的调度切换方法。
第十三方面，提供了一种通信装置，该通信装置可以为终端或者终端中的芯片或者片上系统，该通信装置包括一个或者多个处理器以及和一个或多个存储器。所述一个或多个存储器与所述一个或多个处理器耦合，所述一个或多个存储器用于存储计算机程序代码，所述计算机程序代码包括计算机指令，当所述一个或多个处理器执行所述计算机指令时，使所述通信装置执行如上述第八方面或者第八方面的任一可能的设计所述的调度切换方法。
其中，第九方面至第十三方面中任一种设计方式所带来的技术效果可参见上述第八方面或者第八方面的任一种可能的设计所带来的技术效果，不再赘述。
第十四方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信系统，包括如第九方面至第十三方面中任一方面所述的终端以及网络设备。
第十五方面，本申请实施例提供又一种调度方法，所述方法包括：终端接收网络设备发送的切换指示；其中，切换指示用于指示将终端由第一带宽部分BWP切换到第二BWP；终端根据第一BWP上的最小时隙间隔，第一BWP的系统参数numerology，以及第二BWP的numerology，确定第二BWP上的最小时隙间隔。
基于第十五方面，可以在BWP切换的情况下，根据切换前后两个BWP的系统参数确定切换后的BWP的最小时隙间隔，如此，可以在切换前后两个BWP的子载波间隔不同的情况下，适时调整切换后的BWP的最小时隙间隔，保证最小时隙间隔的时间长度相同。
一种可能的设计中，结合第十五方面，终端根据第一BWP上的最小时隙间隔，第一BWP的numerology，以及第二BWP的numerology，确定第二BWP上的最小时隙间隔，包括：终端根据第一BWP上的最小时隙间隔、第一系数确定第二BWP上的最小时隙间隔；其中，第一系数根据第二BWP的numerology与第一BWP的numerology确定。
一种可能的设计中，结合第十五方面的可能的设计，所述第一系数等于
Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-000003
其中μ 2为所述第二BWP的参数numerology，所述μ 1为所述第一下行BWP的numerology。
基于该可能的设计，可以根据切换前后两个BWP的系统参数的比值确定切换后的BWP的最小时隙间隔，简单易行。
第十六方面，本申请提供一种通信装置，该通信装置可以为终端或者终端中的芯片或者片上系统，还可以为终端中用于实现第十五方面或第十五方面的任一可能的设计所述的方法的功能模块。该通信装置可以实现上述各方面或者各可能的设计中终端所执行的功能，所述功能可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。所述硬件或软件包括一个或多个上述功能相应的模块。如：该通信装置可以包括：接收单元，确定单元；
接收单元，用于接收网络设备发送的切换指示；其中，切换指示用于指示将终端由第一带宽部分BWP切换到第二BWP；
确定单元，用于根据第一BWP上的最小时隙间隔，第一BWP的系统参数numerology，以及第二BWP的numerology，确定第二BWP上的最小时隙间隔。
其中，该通信装置的具体实现方式可以参考第十五方面或第十五方面的任一种可能的设计提供的调度切换方法中终端的行为功能，在此不再重复赘述。因此，该提供的通信装置可以达到与第十五方面或者第十五方面的任一种可能的设计相同的有益效果。
第十七方面，提供了一种通信装置，该通信装置可以为终端或者终端中的芯片或者片上系统。该通信装置可以实现上述各方面或者各可能的设计中终端所执行的功能，所述功能可以通过硬件实现。一种可能的设计中，该通信装置可以包括：处理器和通信接口，处理器可以用于支持通信装置实现上述第十五方面或者第十五方面的任一种可能的设计中所涉及的功能，例如：处理器可以通过通信接口接收网络设备发送的切换指示；其中，切换指示用于指示将终端由第一带宽部分BWP切换到第二BWP；根据第一BWP上的最小时隙间隔，第一BWP的系统参数numerology，以及第二BWP的numerology，确定第二BWP上的最小时隙间隔。在又一种可能的设计中，所述通信装置还可以包括存储器，存储器，用于保存通信装置必要的计算机执行指令和数据。当该通信装置运行时，该处理器执行该存储器存储的该计算机执行指令，以使该通信装置执行如上述第十五方面或者第十五方面的任一种可能的设计所述的调度切换方法。
第十八方面，提供了一种计算机可读存储介质，该计算机可读存储介质可以为可读的非易失性存储介质，该计算机可读存储介质中存储有指令，当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机可以执行上述第十五方面或者上述方面的任一种可能的设计所述的调度切换方法。
第十九方面，提供了一种包含指令的计算机程序产品，当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机可以执行上述第十五方面或者上述方面的任一种可能的设计所述的调度切换方法。
第二十方面，提供了一种通信装置，该通信装置可以为终端或者终端中的芯片或者片上系统，该通信装置包括一个或者多个处理器以及和一个或多个存储器。所述一个或多个存储器与所述一个或多个处理器耦合，所述一个或多个存储器用于存储计算机程序代码，所述计算机程序代码包括计算机指令，当所述一个或多个处理器执行所述计算机指令时，使所述通信装置执行如上述第十五方面或者第十五方面的任一可能的设计所述的调度切换方法。
其中，第十五方面至第二十方面中任一种设计方式所带来的技术效果可参见上述第十五方面或者第十五方面的任一种可能的设计所带来的技术效果，不再赘述。
第二十一方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信系统，包括如第十五方面至第十九方面中 任一方面所述的终端以及网络设备。
附图说明
图1为PDCCH调度示意图；
图2为本申请实施例提供的一种终端节能示意图；
图3为本申请实施例提供的一种系统架构的简化示意图；
图4为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置示意图；
图5为本申请实施例提供的一种调度切换方式示意图；
图6a为本申请实施例提供的一种调度方式的生效时间示意图；
图6b为本申请实施例提供的一种调度方式的生效时间示意图；
图6c为本申请实施例提供的一种调度方式的生效时间示意图；
图7a为本申请实施例提供的一种调度方式的生效时间示意图；
图7b为本申请实施例提供的一种调度方式的生效时间示意图；
图7c为本申请实施例提供的一种调度方式的生效时间示意图；
图8a为本申请实施例提供的一种调度方式的生效时间示意图；
图8b为本申请实施例提供的一种调度方式的生效时间示意图；
图8c为本申请实施例提供的一种调度方式的生效时间示意图；
图9a为本申请实施例提供的一种调度方式的生效时间示意图；
图9b为本申请实施例提供的一种调度方式的生效时间示意图；
图10a为本申请实施例提供的一种调度方式的生效时间示意图；
图10b为本申请实施例提供的一种调度方式的生效时间示意图；
图10c为本申请实施例提供的一种调度方式的生效时间示意图；
图11a为本申请实施例提供的一种调度方式的生效时间示意图；
图11b为本申请实施例提供的一种调度方式的生效时间示意图；
图11c为本申请实施例提供的一种调度方式的生效时间示意图；
图11d为本申请实施例提供的一种调度方式的生效时间示意图；
图11e为本申请实施例提供的又一种调度方式的生效时间示意图；
图12为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置120的组成示意图；
图13为本申请实施例提供的一种调度切换系统的组成示意图。
具体实施方式
为便于理解本申请实施例提供的方法，在介绍本申请实施例之前，对本申请实施例涉及的一些名词进行解释：
物理下行控制信道(physical downlink control channel，PDCCH)，主要用于承载下行控制信息(downlink control information，DCI)，DCI可以包括公共控制信息(如：系统信息等)和用户专属信息(如：下行资源分配指示，上行调度，随机接入响应，上行功率控制参数等)等。PDCCH可以通过其承载的DCI调度数据信道，如：DCI可以用于指示数据信道的传输参数(如：数据信道的时域资源位置等)，在传输数据信道之前，网络设备可以向终端发送PDCCH，终端接收到PDCCH后，可以先解调PDCCH中的DCI，然后在DCI所指示的时域资源位置上传输数据信道。
数据信道，可以用于承载数据。3GPP协议中根据数据信道上承载的数据的不同将数 据信道分为：物理上行数据信道(physical uplink shared channel，PUSCH)(或者称为上行数据信道)和物理下行数据信道(physical downlink channel，PDSCH)(或者称为下行数据信道)。其中，PUSCH用于承载从终端向网络设备发送的数据(或称为上行数据)，PDSCH用于承载从网络设备向终端发送的数据(或者称为下行数据)。
进一步，PDCCH还可以通过其承载的DCI指示信道状态信息参考信号(channel state information reference signal，CSI-RS)的时域资源位置，以触发非周期(nonperiodic)CSI-RS的发送，和/或，PDCCH可以通过其承载的DCI指示探测参考信号(sounding reference signal，SRS)的时域资源位置，以触发非周期SRS的发送等。以PDCCH触发CSI-RS的发送为例，网络设备可以向终端发送PDCCH，PDCCH承载的DCI用于指示CSI-RS的时域资源位置，终端接收到PDCCH后，可以解调PDCCH中的DCI，在DCI所指示的时域资源位置接收网络设备发送的CSI-RS。
CSI-RS，用于终端测量终端与网络设备间的信道状态，CSI-RS可以包括一个或者多个信道状态测量资源。例如，网络设备可以向终端发送用于指示CSI-RS的时域资源位置的DCI以及CSI-RS，终端在DCI所指示的时域资源位置上接收CSI-RS，并对CSI-RS包括的信道状态测量资源进行测量，根据测量结果向网络设备上报信道状态信息(channel state information，CSI)。
SRS，用于网络设备测量其与终端之间的信道信息。如：网络设备可以向终端发送用于指示SRS的时域资源位置的DCI，终端接收DCI，在DCI所指示的时域资源位置上，通过终端的部分或全部天线向网络设备发送SRS，网络设备接收SRS，并根据接收到的SRS测量其与终端之间的信道信息。
带宽部分(bandwidth part，BWP)，用于传输信号。3GPP标准中，可以根据BWP上传输的信号的方向将带宽部分分为上行带宽部分(uplink bandwidth part，UP BWP)和下行带宽部分(downlink bandwidth part，DL BWP)两类。其中，UP BWP可以用于传输从终端发往网络设备的信号，即终端可以在UL BWP上发送上行信号；下行BWP可以用于传输从网络设备发往终端的信号，终端可以在DL BWP上接收下行信号。
不同BWP可能配置不同的BWP参数，BWP参数可以包括BWP的numerology(系统参数或者参数)。numerology对应BWP的子载波间隔，以及BWP的时隙长度、循环前缀(cyclic prefix，CP)长度等参数。其中，BWP的子载波间隔等于2 μ×15[kHz]，μ为BWP的numerology。BWP的numerology越大，BWP的子载波间隔越大，对应的符号长度越短。比如，BWP的子载波间隔为15kHz时，其对应的一个时隙的长度为1ms，BWP的子载波间隔为30kHz时，其对应的一个时隙的长度为0.5ms。
例如，下表a为BWP参数表，如表a所示，numerology可以由五个取值：0～4，这五个取值分别对应的子载波间隔为：15kHz、30kHz、60kHz、120kHz、240kHz。
表a
numerology 子载波间隔(kHz)
0 15
1 30
2 60
3 120
4 240
3GPP标准中，终端在一个小区工作的时候，仅有一个激活的UL BWP和一个激活的DL BWP，即同一时刻，终端仅工作在一个激活的UL BWP和一个激活的DL BWP上。其中，激活的BWP存在变化，即BWP可以随时切换。例如，网络设备为终端配置了DL BWP1和DL BWP2两个DL BWP，激活的DL BWP为DL BWP1，此时网络设备可以通过PDCCH发送BWP切换指示，指示终端从DL BWP1切换到DL BWP2。同理，网络设备也可以通过PDCCH指示终端的激活的UL BWP进行切换。切换前的BWP与切换后的BWP的numerology可能是不同的。
其中，一个PDCCH可以占用一个时隙(slot)内的一个或者多个符号。本申请实施例不限定PDCCH占用的时隙，以及，PDCCH在时隙内所占用的符号的起始位置以及符号的个数。可选的，当PDCCH用于调度数据信道时，网络设备事先为终端配置调度信息监测时机(scheduling information monitoring occasion)，终端在网络设备配置的调度信息监测时机到来时开始监测PDCCH。其中，调度信息监测时机可以周期性地配置给终端，以便终端周期性的监测PDCCH。
其中，PDCCH所占用的时隙与PDCCH调度的数据信道和/或触发的参考信号所占用的时隙可以相同，也可以不同。3GPP协议中，根据PDCCH所占用的时隙与PDCCH调度的数据信道和/或触发的参考信号所占用的时隙的情况，将终端的调度方式分为：同时隙调度(single slot scheduling)、跨时隙调度(cross-slot scheduling)。其中，同时隙调度可以指PDCCH与其调度的数据信道和/或触发的参考信号位于同一时隙，跨时隙调度可以指PDCCH与其调度的数据信道和/或触发的参考信号位于不同时隙，例如：
当PDCCH用于调度PDSCH时，PDCCH与其调度的PDSCH可以处于同一时隙，即同时隙调度，也可以处于不同时隙，即跨时隙调度。3GPP协议中，通过K0值指示PDCCH与其调度的PDSCH是同时隙调度或者跨时隙调度。其中，K0值是PDCCH所占用的时隙与其调度的PDSCH所占用的时隙之间间隔的时隙差，K0的取值有一个取值集合，该取值集合由网络设备配置给终端，例如可以为{0，1，2…….}。如果K0＝0，表示PDCCH与PDSCH在同一个时隙，即“同时隙调度”。如果K0>0，表示PDCCH与PDSCH不在同一个时隙，即“跨时隙调度”。网络设备可以将K0值直接指示给终端，或者，由网络设备为终端配置一个时域资源分配(time domain resource allocation，TDRA)表格，该TDRA表格包括索引值(index)以及索引值对应的K0值，网络设备可以通过向终端指示索引值来间接地将K0值指示给终端。
例如，下表一为PDCCH调度PDSCH时，网络设备为终端配置的TDRA表格的示意图，该TDRA表格包括索引值与K0值间的对应关系，如表一所示，索引值为0时，K0值为0；索引值为1时，K0值为1；索引值为2时，K0值为1。当网络设备通过PDCCH向终端调度PDSCH时，网络设备可以向终端配置表一所示的TDRA表格，后续，若网络设备向终端指示索引值1，则终端可以以索引值为1为索引，查询表一，确定与索引值1对应的K0值为1，PDCCH与PDSCH处于不同时隙，即跨时隙调度。
表一
索引值(index) K0值
0 0
1 1
2 1
当PDCCH用于调度PUSCH时，PDCCH与其调度的PUSCH可以处于同一时隙，即同时隙调度，也可以处于不同时隙，即跨时隙调度。3GPP协议中，通过K2值指示PDCCH与其调度的PUSCH是同时隙调度或者跨时隙调度。其中，K2值是PDCCH所占用的时隙与其调度的PUSCH所占用的时隙之间间隔的时隙差，K2的取值有一个取值集合，该取值集合由网络设备配置给终端，例如可以为{0，1，2…….}。如果K2＝0，表示PDCCH与PUSCH在同一个时隙，即“同时隙调度”。如果K2>0，表示PDCCH与PUSCH不在同一个时隙，即“跨时隙调度”。网络设备可以将K2值直接指示给终端，或者，由网络设备为终端配置一个TDRA表格，该TDRA表格包括索引值(index)以及索引值对应的K2值，网络设备可以通过向终端指示索引值来间接地将K2值指示给终端。
例如，下表二为PDCCH调度PUSCH时，网络设备为终端配置的TDRA表格的示意图，该TDRA表格包括索引值与K2值间的对应关系，如表二所示，索引值为0时，K2值为0；索引值为1时，K2值为2。当网络设备通过PDCCH向终端调度PUSCH时，网络设备可以向终端配置表二所示的TDRA表格，后续，若网络设备向终端指示索引值1，则终端可以以索引值为1为索引，查询表二，确定与索引值1对应的K2值为2，PDCCH与PDSCH处于不同时隙，二者之间相差2个时隙，即跨时隙调度。
表二
索引值(index) K2值
0 2
1 2
需要说明的是，表一和表二仅为示例性表格，除表中所示内容之外，表一和表二还可以包括其他内容，如：还可以包括开始和长度指示值(starting and length incdication value)、映射类型(mapping type)等，本申请对此不予限制。
当PDCCH用于触发CSI-RS时，PDCCH与其触发的CSI-RS可以处于同一时隙，即同时隙调度，也可以处于不同时隙，即跨时隙调度。3GPP协议中，通过非周期CSI-RS触发偏移值(triggering offset)指示PDCCH与其调度的CSI-RS是同时隙调度或者跨时隙调度。其中，非周期CSI-RS触发偏移值是PDCCH所占用的时隙与其调度的CSI-RS所占用的时隙之间间隔的时隙差，非周期CSI-RS触发偏移值的取值可以包括在取值集合{0，1，2…….}中，该取值集合可以由网络设备配置给终端。如果非周期CSI-RS触发偏移值＝0，表示PDCCH与其触发的CSI-RS在同一个时隙，即“同时隙调度”。如果非周期CSI-RS触发偏移值大于0，表示PDCCH与其触发的CSI-RS在不同时隙，即“跨时隙调度”。网络设备可以将非周期CSI-RS触发偏移值直接指示给终端，或者，由网络设备通过其他方式将非周期CSI-RS触发偏移值指示给终端，不予限制。
当PDCCH用于触发SRS时，PDCCH与其触发的SRS可以处于同一时隙，即同时隙调度，也可以处于不同时隙，即跨时隙调度。3GPP协议中，通过非周期SRS触发偏移值(triggering offset)指示PDCCH与其调度的SRS是同时隙调度或者跨时隙调度。其中，非周期SRS触发偏移值是PDCCH所占用的时隙与其调度的SRS所占用的时隙之间间隔的时隙差，非周期SRS触发偏移值的取值可以包括在取值集合{0，1，2…….}中，该取值集合 可以由网络设备配置给终端。如果非周期SRS触发偏移值＝0，表示PDCCH与其触发的SRS在同一个时隙，即“同时隙调度”。如果非周期SRS触发偏移值大于0，表示PDCCH与其触发的SRS在不同时隙，即“跨时隙调度”。网络设备可以将非周期SRS触发偏移值直接指示给终端，或者，由网络设备通过其他方式将非周期SRS触发偏移值指示给终端。
例如，以PDCCH占用slot0，PDCCH调度PDSCH和PUSCH为例，如图1所示，PDSCH占用的时隙位置根据K0值变化而变化，PUSCH占用的时隙位置根据K2值的变化而变化。例如，当PDCCH调度PDSCH0时，K0＝0，表示PDCCH与其调度的PDSCH0所占用的时隙之间的时隙差为0，因此，PDSCH0也位于第0个时隙，即图1中的slot0；当PDCCH调度PDSCH1时，K0＝1，表示PDCCH与其调度的PDSCH1所占用的时隙之间的时隙差为1，因此，PDSCH1位于第0+1＝1个时隙：slot1；当PDCCH调度PDSCH2时，K0＝1，表示PDCCH与其调度的PDSCH2所占用的时隙之间的时隙差为1，因此，PDSCH1位于第0+1＝1个时隙：slot1。当PDCCH调度PUSCH0时，K2＝2，表示PDCCH与其调度的PUSCH0所占用的时隙之间的时隙差为2，因此，PUSCH0位于第0+2＝2个时隙：slot2。当PDCCH调度PUSCH1时，K2＝2，表示PDCCH与其调度的PUSCH1所占用的时隙之间的时隙差为2，因此，PUSCH0位于第0+2＝2个时隙：slot2。
目前，为了达到减少终端功耗的目的，可以从两方面进行优化：一是在有业务负载(即有数据需要传输)时，提升数据传输效率；二是在没有业务负载(即无数据需要传输)时，减少终端的能量消耗。针对第二点，在国际电信联盟无线电通信组(international telecommunication union–radiocommunicationssector，ITU-R)的报告中提到，可以通过增大终端处于睡眠状态的比例来达到减少终端的能量消耗的目的。
例如，如图2所示，终端在t1时段接收到PDCCH，如图2左侧所示，如果终端不知道当前时隙内是否有同时隙调度(只要基站配置的TDRA表格中包括K0＝0，就可能存在同时隙调度)，为了避免数据和/信号丢失，终端在接收PDCCH之后，解码PDCCH的同时，必须缓存数据和/或信号，如图2左侧所示部分t2时段内，终端需要时刻开启自身的射频模块，以缓存数据和/或信号。如果如图2右侧所示，终端提前能够知道PDCCH与数据信道之间为跨时隙调度，当前时隙一定不会存在PDCCH调度的数据信道和/或触发的参考信号，那么终端在接收PDCCH之后，解码PDCCH的过程中，可以把自身射频模块关闭，不缓存任何数据和/或信号，以达到节能的效果，如图2右侧所示部分t2时段对应的阴影部分即为终端节省的能量。
由上可知，当终端没有数据业务的时候，应该让终端处于“跨时隙调度”的状态下，用以节省功耗(前提是所有K0都满足K0>0)；当终端有数据业务到来的时候，应该让终端处于“同时隙调度”的状态下，以保证数据快速传输完毕，减少时延。为了令终端的调度方式能够快速匹配终端当前的业务类型，可以采用动态信令指示调度方式的切换，如：指示TDRA表格中“有效的(valid)”的子集。举例来说，表格中有3行，其中第一行为K0＝0，后两行为K0>0。可以指示仅后两行有效。或者，网络设备配置多个TDRA表格(如：配置多个如上述表一所示的TDRA表格)，动态指示哪个表格是“有效的(valid)”。比如配置两个TDRA表格，第一个TDRA表格中存在K0＝0，第二个TDRA表格中所有K0均满足K0>＝2。或者，网络设备动态指示一个最小的K0值。比如动态指示K0最小为3等。但是，该方案只是简单的描述了如何去指示调度方式。但是并没有详细规定“调度方式”的生效时间。如果 调度方式的生效时间不加以明确规定，就可能造成网络设备和终端之间的信令模糊的问题。例如，上述配置两个TDRA表格，动态指示哪个生效的方法中，网络设备和终端可能就会在某个时间点认为不同的表格在生效。为解决该问题，本申请实施例提供了一种调度切换方式，以明确定义调度方式切换的生效时间。
下面结合附图对本申请实施例提供的调度切换方法进行详细描述。
本申请实施例提供的调度切换方法可用于支持多种调度方式的通信系统，如：可以适用于第四代(4 th generation，4G)系统、长期演进(long term evolution，LTE)系统、第五代(5th generation，5G)系统、新空口(new radio，NR)系统、NR-车与任何事物通信(vehicle-to-everything，V2X)系统中的任一系统，还可以适用于其他下一代通信系统等，不予限制。下面以图3所示通信系统为例，对本申请实施例提供的方法进行描述。
图3是本申请实施例提供的一种通信系统的示意图，如图3所示，该通信系统可以包括网络设备以及多个终端(如终端1、终端2)。终端可以位于网络设备的覆盖范围内，与网络设备通过连接。在图3所示系统中，终端可以接收网络设备发送的PDCCH，并在PDCCH包括的DCI的指示下向网络设备发送PUSCH或者接收网络设备发送的PDSCH，或者，在PDCCH包括的DCI的指示下接收网络设备发送的CSI-RS或者向网络设备上报SRS等。
其中，网络设备，主要用于实现终端的资源调度、无线资源管理、无线接入控制等功能。具体的，网络设备可以为小型基站、无线接入点、收发点(transmission receive point，TRP)传输点(transmission point，TP)以及某种其它接入节点中的任一节点。本申请实施例中，用于实现网络设备的功能的装置可以是网络设备，也可以是能够支持网络设备实现该功能的装置或者功能模块，例如芯片系统。下面以用于实现网络设备的功能的装置是网络设备为例，描述本申请实施例提供的调度切换方法。
终端，可以为终端设备(terminal equipment)或者用户设备(user equipment，UE)或者移动台(mobile station，MS)或者移动终端(mobile terminal，MT)等。如：图3中的终端可以是手机(mobile phone)、平板电脑或带无线收发功能的电脑，还可以是虚拟现实(virtual reality，VR)终端、增强现实(augmented reality，AR)终端、工业控制中的无线终端、无人驾驶中的无线终端、远程医疗中的无线终端、智能电网中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智能家居、车载终端等。本申请实施例中，用于实现终端的功能的装置可以是终端，也可以是能够支持终端实现该功能的装置，例如芯片系统。下面以用于实现终端的功能的装置是终端为例，描述本申请实施例提供的调度切换方法。
在图3所示系统中，网络设备可以向终端发送切换指示，指示终端从第一调度方式切换到第二调度方式，如：从同时隙调度切换到跨时隙调度，或者，从跨时隙调度切换到同时隙调度，终端接收到切换指示后，可以确定第二调度方式的生效时间，在第二调度方式的生效时间到来之时采用第二调度方式调度数据信道和/或触发参考信号。尤其是，在第二调度方式为跨时隙调度的情况下，终端关闭自身射频模块，以达到节能的目的。具体的，该过程可参照图5对应的实施例中所述。
需要说明的是，图3仅为示例性框架图，图3中包括的节点的数量不受限制，且除图3所示功能节点外，图3所示通信系统还可以包括其他节点，如：核心网设备、网关设备、应用服务器等等，不予限制。
在具体实现时，图4所示终端可采用图4所示的组成结构或者包括图4所示的部件。
图4为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置400的组成示意图，该通信装置400可以为终端或者终端中的芯片或者片上系统。该通信装置400可以包括处理器401，通信线路402以及通信接口403。进一步的，该通信装置400还可以包括存储器404。其中，处理器401，存储器404以及通信接口403之间可以通过通信线路402连接。
其中，处理器401可以是中央处理器(central processing unit，CPU)、通用处理器网络处理器(network processor，NP)、数字信号处理器(digital signal processing，DSP)、微处理器、微控制器、可编程逻辑器件(programmable logic device，PLD)或它们的任意组合。处理器401还可以是其它具有处理功能的装置，如电路、器件或软件模块等。
通信线路402，用于在通信装置400所包括的各部件之间传送信息。
通信接口403，用于与其他设备或其它通信网络进行通信。该其它通信网络可以为以太网，无线接入网(radio access network，RAN)，无线局域网(wireless local area networks，WLAN)等。通信接口403可以是射频模块、收发器或者任何能够实现通信的装置。本申请实施例仅以通信接口403为射频模块为例进行说明，其中，射频模块可以包括天线、射频电路等，射频电路可以包括射频集成芯片、功率放大器等。
存储器404，用于存储指令。其中，指令可以是计算机程序。
其中，存储器404可以是只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)或可存储静态信息和/或指令的其他类型的静态存储设备，也可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)或者可存储信息和/或指令的其他类型的动态存储设备，还可以是电可擦可编程只读存储器(electrically erasable programmable read-only memory，EEPROM)、只读光盘(compact disc read-only memory，CD-ROM)或其他光盘存储、光碟存储(包括压缩光碟、激光碟、光碟、数字通用光碟、蓝光光碟等)、磁盘存储介质或者其他磁存储设备等。
需要说明的是，存储器404可以独立于处理器401存在，也可以和处理器401集成在一起。存储器404可以用于存储指令或者程序代码或者一些数据等。存储器404可以位于通信装置400内，也可以位于通信装置400外，不予限制。
处理器401，用于执行存储器404中存储的指令，以实现本申请下述实施例提供的调度切换方法。例如，当通信装置400为终端或者终端中的芯片或者片上系统时，处理器401可以执行存储器404中存储的指令，以实现本申请下述实施例中终端所执行的步骤。再例如，当通信装置400为功能实体或者功能实体中的芯片或者片上系统时，处理器401可以执行存储器404中存储的指令，以实现本申请下述实施例中功能实体所执行的步骤。
在一种示例中，处理器401可以包括一个或多个CPU，例如图4中的CPU0和CPU1。
作为一种可选的实现方式，通信装置400包括多个处理器，例如，除图4中的处理器401之外，还可以包括处理器407。
作为一种可选的实现方式，通信装置400还包括输出设备405和输入设备406。示例性地，输入设备406是键盘、鼠标、麦克风或操作杆等设备，输出设备405是显示屏、扬声器(speaker)等设备。
需要说明的是，通信装置400可以是台式机、便携式电脑、网络服务器、移动手机、平板电脑、无线终端、嵌入式设备、芯片系统或有图4中类似结构的设备。此外，图4中示出的组成结构并不构成对该通信装置的限定，除图4所示部件之外，该通信装置可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件，或者组合某些部件，或者不同的部件布置。
本申请实施例中，芯片系统可以由芯片构成，也可以包括芯片和其他分立器件。
此外，本申请的各实施例之间涉及的动作，术语等均可以相互参考，不予限制。本申请的实施例中各个设备之间交互的消息名称或消息中的参数名称等只是一个示例，具体实现中也可以采用其他的名称，不予限制。例如，下述实施例中的切换指示还可以描述为功耗节省信号(power saving signal)等，不予限制。
下面结合图3所示通信系统，对本申请实施例提供的调度切换方法进行描述。
图5为本申请实施例提供的一种调度切换方法流程图，如图5所示，该方法可以包括步骤501～步骤502：
步骤501：网络设备向终端发送切换指示。
其中，网络设备可以为图3中的网络设备，终端可以为图3所示系统中的任一终端。
其中，切换指示可以用于指示终端从第一调度方式切换到第二调度方式。第一调度方式与第二调度方式不同，第一调度方式可以为同时隙调度，第二调度方式可以为跨时隙调度；或者，第一调度方式为跨时隙调度，第二调度方式为同时隙调度，或者，第一调度方式、第二调度方式均为跨时隙调度，但是第一调度方式下PDCCH占用的时隙与PDCCH调度的数据信道占用的时隙之间的时隙差与第一调度方式下PDCCH占用的时隙与PDCCH调度的数据信道占用的时隙之间的时隙差不同，如：第一调度方式下，K0值为1，第二调度方式下K0值为2等，本申请对此不予限制。同时隙调度、跨时隙调度的相关描述可参照上文，不再赘述。
其中，一种可能的设计中，切换指示可以包括用于明确指示第二调度方式的指示符，该指示符可以为二进制比特数，如：当切换指示包括二进制比特0时，表示终端的调度方式为同时隙调度，当切换指示包括二进制比特1时，表示终端的调度方式为跨时隙调度。
又一种可能的设计中，切换指示可以包括与第二调度方式对应的参数值，如：切换指示可以包括下述任一个或者多个参数值：最小K0值、最小K2值、最小非周期CSI-RS触发偏移值，最小非周期SRS触发偏移值，终端可以通过切换指示包括的参数值确定切换到哪种调度方式。例如，若切换指示包括最小K0值，且最小K0值大于0，则确定终端将切换到跨时隙调度，若切换指示包括最小K0值，且最小K0值等于0，则确定可能存在同时隙调度，也可能存在跨时隙调度。若切换指示包括K0值，且K0值等于0，则确定终端将切换到同时隙调度。
再一种可能的设计中，切换指示可以包括索引值(index)，该索引值可以用于指示第二调度方式，如：该索引值(index)可以与最小K0值或者最小K2值或者最小非周期CSI-RS触发偏移值或者最小非周期SRS触发偏移值对应，终端可以通过索引值确定最小K0值或者最小K2值或者最小非周期CSI-RS触发偏移值或者最小非周期SRS触发偏移值，进而根据最小K0值或者最小K2值或者最小非周期CSI-RS触发偏移值或者最小非周期SRS触发偏移值确定终端的调度方式。
示例性的，网络设备可以通过其与终端之间的通信链路，向终端发送切换指示。具体的，切换指示可以通过PDCCH发送给终端，如：切换指示可以通过PDCCH传输的DCI中的某个字段中发送给终端，或者，切换指示也可以通过其他信令发送给终端，如：切换指示可以通过PDSCH上传输的媒体接入控制控制元素(media access control control element，MAC CE)发送给终端，本申请对此不予限制。
需要说明的是，本申请实施例不限定切换指示的命名，可选的，切换指示还可以命名为其他消息，如：切换指示还可以命名为功耗节省信号等，本申请对此不予限制。
步骤502：终端接收切换指示，确定第二调度方式的生效时间。
示例性的，当切换指示通过PDCCH传输的DCI发送给终端时，终端可以接收网络设备发送的PDCCH，从PDCCH包括的DCI中获取切换指示；当切换指示通过PDSCH上传输的MAC CE发送给终端时，终端可以接收网络设备发送的PDSCH，从PDSCH包括的MAC CE中获取切换指示。
其中，第二调度方式的生效时间可以指终端可采用第二调度方式调度数据信道(如：PDSCH、PUSCH)和/或触发参考信号(如：CSI-RS、SRS)的时间；或者，第二调度方式开始生效的时间。在第二调度方式的生效时间到来之时或者第二调度方式的生效时间到来之后、下次切换指示到来之前，终端可以调整自身的功能模块(如：射频模块以及用于解调PDCCH的处理模块等)，采用第二调度方式调度数据信道和/或触发参考信号。例如，当第二调度方式为跨时隙调度时，终端可以在第二调度方式的生效时间之后(包括第二调度方式的生效时间)，关闭自身的射频模块，以达到终端节能的目的。
本申请实施例中，为了保证切换指示发送的可靠性、终端与网络设备之间传输的数据信道的可靠性等，可以根据终端是否正确接收PDCCH的情况、终端是否正确接收PDCCH调度的数据信道的情况、终端自身处理PDCCH的能力等一种或者多种因素确定第二调度方式的生效时间。具体的，第二调度方式的生效时间的确定过程可参照下述方式一～方式七所述。
基于图5所示方式，终端可以在接收到切换指示后，明确切换后的调度方式的生效时间，以便终端在第二调度方式的生效时间到来时，采用第二调度方式调度数据信道和/触发参考信号，尤其是在第二调度方式为跨时隙调度时，若终端希望自身处于节能状态，则终端可以在第二调度方式的生效时间之后的某个时间段(如：终端接收调度数据的PDCCH之后、解调完毕该PDCCH之前的时间段)关闭自身的射频模块，以进入节能状态。
下面结合下述方式一～方式六，对第二调度方式的生效时间的几种可能取值进行描述：
方式一：切换指示包括在PDCCH中，该PDCCH可以不用于调度数据信道和/或触发参考信号，也可以用于调度数据信道和/或者触发参考信号，本申请对此不予限制。
其中，切换指示包括在PDCCH中还可以描述为切换指示承载在PDCCH上，或者，切换指示通过PDCCH发送给终端，或者，切换指示包括在PDCCH内的DCI中，为DCI中的一个字段，或者，切换指示通过PDCCH上的DCI发送给终端，或者，切换指示为PDCCH中的DCI等，本申请对此不予限制。
方式一中，为了保证PDCCH包括的切换指示的可靠性(或者准确性)，该PDCCH可以对应有反馈信息，一旦终端接收到该PDCCH，终端则会将其接收情况反馈给网络设备，以便网络设备获知终端是否正确接收到该PDCCH，若网络设备获知终端未正确接收到PDCCH，则重新发送包括切换指示的PDCCH。
其中，包括切换指示的PDCCH对应的反馈信息可以称为PDCCH的反馈信息，PDCCH的反馈信息可以包括在PUCCH或者PUSCH中，PDCCH的反馈信息可以占用一个时隙中的一个或者多个符号，一个符号可以占用几十微秒(us)。PDCCH的反馈信息可以用于指示终端是否正确接收到包括切换指示的PDCCH，PDCCH的反馈信息可以为确认消息 (acknowledge，ACK)或者否认消息(non-acknowledge，NACK)。若终端正确接收到PDCCH，则向网络设备发送ACK，反之，若终端未正确接收到包括切换指示的PDCCH，则向网络设备发送NACK，以便网络设备重新传输切换指示，以保证PDCCH包括的切换指示的可靠性。例如：终端可以采用循环冗余码检验(cyclic redundancy check，CRC)方式来验证自身是否正确接收到包括切换指示的PDCCH，不再详述。
为了避免终端因无法向网络设备发送PDCCH的反馈信息，导致PDCCH包括的切换指示的可靠性降低的问题，在方式一中，第二调度方式的生效时间可以在包括切换指示的PDCCH的反馈信息发送之后。
具体的，第二调度方式的生效时间可以设计为下述(1.1)或(1.2)或(1.3)所示：
(1.1)第二调度方式的生效时间为PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的最后一个符号的下一符号(symbol)。
其中，PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的最后一个符号的下一符号可以为与PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的最后一个符号相邻的符号，也可以为PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的最后一个符号之后的任意符号，本申请对此不予限制。
其中，本申请实施例所述的符号具有一定的长度，一个符号的时间长度可以为几十微秒(us)，如：一个符号的时间长度可以为71us。当一个符号的时间长度为几十us时，第二调度方式的生效时间为PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的最后一个符号的下一符号可以包括：第二调度方式的生效时间为PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的最后一个符号的下一符号的起始时刻，或者，为PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的最后一个符号的下一符号中的其他任意时刻，如：可以为PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的最后一个符号的下一符号的第Q个us，Q为正整数。
例如，以每个时隙包括14个符号为例，如图6a所示，终端在slot1的第1个符号接收到包括切换指示的PDCCH，并在slot1的第12个符号向网络设备发送包括切换指示的PDCCH的反馈信息，则如图6a中虚线所示，第二调度方式的生效时间可以为slot1中第12个符号之后的第13个符号或者第14个符号。以第二调度方式的生效时间为slot1中第13个符号，每个符号的时间长度为71us为例，第二调度方式的生效时间具体可以是第13个符号的第1us，也可以是第13个符号的第50us，还可以是第13个符号的第71us，本申请对此不予限制。
(1.2)第二调度方式的生效时间为PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的时隙的下一时隙。
其中，PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的时隙的下一时隙可以为与PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的时隙之后，与PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的时隙相邻的时隙，也可以为PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的时隙之后的任意时隙，本申请对此不予限制。
其中，本申请实施例所述的时隙可以包括多个符号，如：一个时隙可以包括12个或者14个符号等。当一个时隙包括多个符号时，第二调度方式的生效时间为PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的时隙的下一时隙可以包括：第二调度方式的生效时间为PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的时隙的下一时隙的起始符号，或者，为PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的时隙的下一时隙中的其他任意符号，如：可以为PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的时隙的下一时隙中第R个符号，R为正整数。或者，当一个时隙包括多个符号，一个符号的时间长度为几十us时，第二调度方式的生效时间为PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的时隙的下一时隙可以包括：第二调度方式的生效时间为PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的时隙的下一时隙中某个符号(如：起始符号或者 其他任意符号，如：第R个符号)的起始时刻，或者，第二调度方式的生效时间为PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的时隙的下一时隙中某个符号中的其他任意时刻，如：某个符号中的第Q个us，Q为整数等。
例如，以每个时隙包括14个符号为例，如图6b所示，终端在slot1的第1个符号接收到包括切换指示的PDCCH，并在slot1上向网络设备发送包括切换指示的PDCCH的反馈信息，则如图6b中虚线所示，第二调度方式的生效时间可以是slot1的下一时隙：slot2。如：当slot包括14个符号时，第二调度方式的生效时间可以是slot2中的第1个符号，也可以是slot2中第10个符号，还可以是slot2中第14个符号等，或者，当每个符号的时间长度为几十us时，第二调度方式的生效时间可以是slot2中第1个符号的第1us，也可以是slot2中第1个符号中的第10us，还可以是slot2中第1个符号的第50us等。
(1.3)第二调度方式的生效时间为PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机。
其中，调度信息监测时机(scheduling information monitoring occasion)，可以为终端监测用于调度数据信道的PDCCH的时机，调度信息监测时机可以占用一个时隙中的一个符号或者多个符号，本申请对此不予限制。终端可以在调度信息监测时机到来之时开始监测用于调度数据信道的PDCCH。实际应用中，网络设备可以为终端配置多个调度信息监测时机，相邻两个调度信息监测时机之间间隔一个或者多个时隙，以便终端周期性的监测用于调度数据信道的PDCCH。
为了避免终端因无法监测调度数据信道的PDCCH，导致数据信道无法正确传输的问题，第二调度方式在PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机到来之时开始生效。当第一个调度信息监测时机占用多个符号时，第二调度方式的生效时间为PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机可以包括：第二调度方式的生效时间为PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机的起始符号，也可以为第一个调度信息监测时机中其他任意符号。
当第一个调度信息监测时机占用多个符号，每个符号占用几十us时，第二调度方式的生效时间为PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机可以包括：第二调度方式的生效时间为PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机中某个符号(如：起始符号或者其他任意符号)的起始时刻，或者，第二调度方式的生效时间为PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机中某个符号(如：起始符号或者其他任意符号)中的其他任意时刻，本申请对此不予限制。
需要说明的是，在(1.3)中，PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机可以为PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的时域位置之后、第一次出现的调度信息监测时机，也可以为PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的时域位置之后其他任意调度信息监测时机，如：可以为PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的时域位置之后第N个调度信息监测时机，N为正整数。
例如，以每个时隙包括14个符号为例，如图6c所示，终端在slot1的第1个符号接收到包括切换指示的PDCCH，并在slot1上向网络设备发送包括DCI的PDCCH的反馈信息，包括DCI的PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机位于slot3，则如图6c中虚线所示，第二调度方式的生效时间可以为slot3。以每个slot包括14 个符号为例，第二调度方式的生效时间可以是slot3的起始符号，如：slot3中的第1个符号，也可以是slot3中第10个符号，还可以是slot3中第14个符号等，或者，以每个符号的时间长度为几十us为例，第二调度方式的生效时间可以是slot3中第1个符号的第1us，也可以是slot3中第1个符号中的第10us，还可以是slot3中第1个符号的第50us等。
方式二、切换指示包括在PDCCH中，且该PDCCH除包括切换指示之外，还可以包括调度信息，该调度信息用于调度终端的下行数据信道(如：PDSCH)。
其中，切换指示包括在PDCCH中还可以描述为切换指示承载在PDCCH上，或者，切换指示通过PDCCH发送给终端，或者，切换指示通过PDCCH发送给终端，或者，切换指示包括在PDCCH内的DCI中，为DCI中的一个字段，或者，切换指示通过PDCCH上的DCI发送给终端，或者，切换指示为PDCCH中的DCI等，本申请对此不予限制。
方式二中，为了保证PDCCH调度的下行数据信道的可靠性，终端需要向网络设备发送下行数据信道的反馈信息，如：一旦终端接收到该PDCCH调度的下行数据信道，终端就将其接收情况反馈给网络设备，以便网络设备获知终端是否正确接收到该PDCCH调度的下行数据信道，若网络设备获知终端未正确接收到PDCCH调度的下行数据信道，则网络设备会重新向终端发送下行数据信道，以保证下行数据信道传输的可靠性。
其中，下行数据信道的反馈信息可以包括在PUCCH或者PUSCH中，下行数据信道的反馈信息可以占用一个时隙中的一个或者多个符号，一个符号可以占用几十微秒(us)。下行数据信道的反馈信息可以用于指示终端是否正确接收到包括切换指示的PDCCH所调度的下行数据信道，下行数据信道的反馈信息可以为ACK或者NACK。若终端正确接收到下行数据信道，则向网络设备发送ACK，反之，若终端未正确接收到下行数据信道，则向网络设备发送NACK，以便网络设备重新传输下行数据信道，以保证下行数据信道传输的可靠性。具体的，终端可以采用现有技术确定自身是否正确接收到PDCCH调度的下行数据信道，不再详述。
为了避免终端因无法向网络设备发送下行数据信道的反馈信息，导致下行数据信道的可靠性降低的问题，在方式二中，第二调度方式的生效时间可以在PDCCH调度的下行数据信道的反馈信息发送之后。
具体的，第二调度方式的生效时间可以设计为如下述(2.1)或(2.2)或(2.3)所示：
(2.1)第二调度方式的生效时间为下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的最后一个符号的下一符号。
其中，下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的最后一个符号的下一符号可以为与下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的最后一个符号相邻的符号，也可以为下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的最后一个符号之后的任意符号，本申请对此不予限制。
当一个符号的时间长度为几十us时，第二调度方式的生效时间为下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的最后一个符号的下一符号可以包括：第二调度方式的生效时间为下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的最后一个符号的下一符号的起始时刻，或者，为下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的最后一个符号的下一符号中的其他时刻，如：可以为下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的最后一个符号的下一符号中的第Q个us，Q为正整数。
例如，以每个时隙包括14个符号为例，如图7a所示，终端在slot0的第1个符号监测到包括切换指示的PDCCH，且该PDCCH所调度的下行数据信道位于slot0，下行数据信道 的反馈信息在slot1的第12个符号，如图7a中虚线所示，第二调度方式的生效时间可以为slot1中第12个符号之后的下一符号，如：slot1中的第13个符号或者第14个符号等。以第二调度方式的生效时间为slot1中的第13个符号，每个符号的时间长度为71us为例，第二调度方式的生效时间具体可以是第13个符号的起始时刻，如：第13个符号的第1us，也可以是第13个符号的第50us，还可以是第13个符号的第71us，本申请对此不予限制。
(2.2)第二调度方式的生效时间为下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时隙的下一时隙。
其中，下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时隙的下一时隙可以为与下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时隙之后，与下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时隙相邻的时隙，也可以为下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时隙之后的任意时隙，本申请对此不予限制。
其中，本申请实施例所述的时隙可以包括多个符号，如：可以包括12个或者14个符号等。当一个时隙包括多个符号时，第二调度方式的生效时间为下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时隙的下一时隙可以包括：第二调度方式的生效时间为下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时隙的下一时隙的起始符号，或者，为下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时隙的下一时隙中的其他任意符号，如：可以为下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时隙的下一时隙中的第R个符号，R为正整数。或者，当下行数据信道的反馈信息占用的时隙包括多个符号，每个符号的时间长度为几十us时，第二调度方式的生效时间为下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时隙的下一时隙可以包括：第二调度方式的生效时间为下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时隙的下一时隙中某个符号(如：起始符号或者其他任意符号)的起始时刻，或者，为下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时隙的下一时隙中某个符号中的其他时刻，如：下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时隙的下一时隙中某个符号中第Q个us，Q为整数。
例如，以每个时隙包括14个符号为例，如图7b所示，终端在slot0的第1个符号监测到包括切换指示的PDCCH，且包括切换指示的PDCCH所调度的下行数据信道位于slot0，下行数据信道的反馈信息在slot1的第12个符号，如图7b中虚线所示，第二调度方式的生效时间可以是slot1的下一时隙，如可以是slot2的起始时刻。具体的，当slot包括14个符号时，第二调度方式的生效时间可以是slot2中的起始符号，如：第1个符号，也可以是slot2中第10个符号，还可以是slot2中第14个符号等，或者，当每个符号的时间长度为几十us时，第二调度方式的生效时间可以是slot2中第1个符号的起始时刻，如：可以是slot2中第1个符号的第1us，也可以是slot2中第1个符号中的第10us，还可以是slot2中第1个符号的第50us等。
(2.3)第二调度方式的生效时间为下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机。
其中，调度信息监测时机的相关描述如方式一中所述，不再赘述。需要说明的是，在(2.3)中，下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机可以为下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时域位置之后、第一次出现的调度信息监测时机，也可以为下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时域位置之后其他任意调度信息监测时机，如：可以为下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时域位置之后第N个调度信息监测时机，N为正整数。
为了避免终端因无法监测调度数据信道的PDCCH，导致数据信道无法正确传输的问题，第二调度方式在下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监 测时机到来之时开始生效。
当第一个调度信息监测时机占用多个符号时，第二调度方式的生效时间为下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机可以包括：第二调度方式的生效时间为下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机的起始符号，或者，为下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机中其他任意符号。
当第一个调度信息监测时机占用多个符号，每个符号占用几十us时，第二调度方式的生效时间为下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机可以包括：第二调度方式的生效时间为下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机中某个符号(如：起始符号或者其他任意符号)的起始时刻，或者，第二调度方式的生效时间为下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机中某个符号(如：起始符号或者其他任意符号)中的其他任意时刻，本申请对此不予限制。
例如，如图7c所示，终端在slot0的第1个符号监测到包括切换指示的PDCCH，且包括切换指示的PDCCH所调度的下行数据信道位于slot0，下行数据信道的反馈信息在slot1的第12个符号，下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机位于slot3，则如图7c中虚线所示，第二调度方式的生效时间可以为slot3的起始时刻或者其他时刻。以每个slot包括14个符号为例，第二调度方式的生效时间可以是slot3中的第1个符号，也可以是slot3中第10个符号，还可以是slot3中第14个符号等，或者，以每个符号的时间长度为几十us为例，第二调度方式的生效时间可以是slot3中第1个符号的第1us，也可以是slot3中第1个符号中的第10us，还可以是slot3中第1个符号的第71us等。
方式三、切换指示包括在PDCCH中，且该PDCCH除包括切换指示之外，还可以包括调度信息，该调度信息用于调度上行数据信道(如：PUSCH)。
其中，切换指示包括在PDCCH中还可以描述为切换指示承载在PDCCH上，或者，切换指示通过PDCCH发送给终端，或者，切换指示通过PDCCH发送给终端，或者，切换指示包括在PDCCH内的DCI中，为DCI中的一个字段，或者，切换指示通过PDCCH上的DCI发送给终端，或者，切换指示为PDCCH中的DCI等，本申请对此不予限制。
方式三中，为了保证PDCCH调度的上行数据信道的可靠性，终端需要在接收到PDCCH调度的上行数据信道之后，才生效第二调度方式。
具体的，第二调度方式的生效时间可以设计为如下述(3.1)或(3.2)或(3.3)所示：
(3.1)第二调度方式的生效时间为上行数据信道所占用的最后一个符号的下一符号。
其中，上行数据信道所占用的最后一个符号的下一符号可以为与上行数据信道所占用的最后一个符号相邻的符号，也可以为上行数据信道所占用的最后一个符号之后的任意符号，本申请对此不予限制。
当一个符号的时间长度为几十us时，第二调度方式的生效时间为上行数据信道所占用的最后一个符号的下一符号可以包括：第二调度方式的生效时间为上行数据信道所占用的最后一个符号的下一符号的起始时刻，或者，为下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的最后一个符号的下一符号中的其他时刻，如：可以为下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的最后一个符号的下一符号中的第Q个us，Q为正整数。
例如，以每个时隙包括14个符号为例，如图8a所示，终端在slot0的第1个符号监测到包括切换指示的PDCCH，且包括切换指示的PDCCH所调度的上行数据信道位于slot0的第12个符号，如图8a中虚线所示，第二调度方式的生效时间可以为slot0中第12个符号之后的下一符号，如：slot0中的第13个符号或者第14个符号等。以第二调度方式的生效时间为slot0中的第13个符号，每个符号的时间长度为71us为例，第二调度方式的生效时间具体可以是slot0中的第13个符号的起始时刻，如：第13个符号的第1us，或者，可以是第13个符号的第50us，或者，可以是第13个符号的第71us，本申请对此不予限制。
(3.2)第二调度方式的生效时间为上行数据信道所占用的时隙的下一时隙。
其中，上行数据信道所占用的时隙的下一时隙可以为与上行数据信道所占用的时隙之后，与上行数据信道所占用的时隙相邻的时隙，也可以为上行数据信道所占用的时隙之后的任意时隙，本申请对此不予限制。
其中，本申请实施例所述的时隙可以包括多个符号，如：包括12个或者14个符号等。当一个时隙包括多个符号时，第二调度方式的生效时间为上行数据信道所占用的时隙的下一时隙可以包括：第二调度方式的生效时间为上行数据信道所占用的时隙的下一时隙的起始符号，或者，为上行数据信道所占用的时隙的下一时隙中的其他任意符号，如：上行数据信道所占用的时隙的下一时隙中的第R个符号，R为正整数。
当上行数据信道占用的时隙包括多个符号，每个符号的时间长度为几十us时，第二调度方式的生效时间为上行数据信道所占用的时隙的下一时隙可以包括：第二调度方式的生效时间为上行数据信道所占用的时隙的下一时隙中某个符号(如：起始符号或者其他任意符号)的起始时刻，或者，为上行数据信道所占用的时隙的下一时隙中某个符号中的其他任意时刻，如：上行数据信道所占用的时隙的下一时隙中某个符号中第Q个us，Q为整数。
例如，以每个时隙包括14个时隙为例，如图8b所示，终端在slot0的第1个符号监测到包括切换指示的PDCCH，且包括切换指示的PDCCH所调度的上行数据信道位于slot0的第12个符号，如图8b中虚线所示，第二调度方式的生效时间可以是slot1的下一时隙，如可以是slot1的起始时刻。具体的，当slot包括14个符号时，第二调度方式的生效时间可以是slot1中的起始符号，如：slot1中的第1个符号，也可以是slot1中第10个符号，还可以是slot1中第14个符号等，或者，当每个符号的时间长度为几十us时，第二调度方式的生效时间可以是slot1中第1个符号的起始时刻，如：可以是slot1中第1个符号的第1us，也可以是slot1中第1个符号中的第10us，还可以是slot1中第1个符号的第71us等。
(3.3)第二调度方式的生效时间为上行数据信道所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机。
其中，调度信息监测时机的相关描述如方式一中所述，不再赘述。需要说明的是，在(3.3)中，上行数据信道所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机可以为上行数据信道所占用的时域位置之后、第一次出现的调度信息监测时机，也可以为上行数据信道所占用的时域位置之后其他任意调度信息监测时机，如：可以为上行数据信道所占用的时域位置之后第N个调度信息监测时机，N为正整数。
为了避免终端因无法监测调度数据信道的PDCCH，导致数据信道无法正确传输的问题，第二调度方式在上行数据信道所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机到来之时开始生效。
当第一个调度信息监测时机占用多个符号时，第二调度方式的生效时间为上行数据信道所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机可以包括：第二调度方式的生效时间为上行数据信道所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机的起始符号，或者，为上行数据信道所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机中其他任意符号。或者，当第一个调度信息监测时机占用多个符号，每个符号占用几十us时，第二调度方式的生效时间为上行数据信道所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机可以包括：第二调度方式的生效时间为上行数据信道所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机中某个符号(如：起始符号或者其他任意符号)的起始时刻，或者，第二调度方式的生效时间为上行数据信道所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机中某个符号(如：起始符号或者其他任意符号)中的其他任意时刻，本申请对此不予限制。
例如，如图8c所示，终端在slot0的第1个符号监测到包括切换指示的PDCCH，且包括切换指示的PDCCH所调度的上行数据信道位于slot0的第12个符号，上行数据信道所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机位于slot2，则如图8c中虚线所示，第二调度方式的生效时间可以为slot2的起始时刻或者其他时刻。以每个slot包括14个符号为例，第二调度方式的生效时间可以是slot2中的第1个符号，也可以是slot2中第10个符号，还可以是slot2中第14个符号等，或者，以每个符号的时间长度为几十us为例，第二调度方式的生效时间可以是slot2中第1个符号的第1us，也可以是slot2中第1个符号中的第10us，还可以是slot2中第1个符号的第71us等。
需要说明的是，上述方式二或方式三仅以包括切换指示的PDCCH用于调度数据信道为例，对第二调度方式的生效时间进行了说明，可理解的是，当包括切换指示的PDCCH还用于触发参考信号，如：触发CSI-RS和/或SRS时，为了不影响CSI-RS和/或SRS的触发，第二调度方式需要在CSI-RS和/或SRS触发之后生效，如：第二调度方式的生效时间可以为PDCCH所触发的参考信号所占用的最后一个符号的下一符号，或者，第二调度方式的生效时间可以为PDCCH所触发的参考信号所占用的时隙的下一时隙，或者，第二调度方式的生效时间可以为PDCCH所触发的参考信号所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机等。
方式四、切换指示包括在PDCCH中，PDCCH第N个时隙，如：PDCCH可以占用第N个时隙中的某个或者某些符号，N为整数。包括切换指示的PDCCH可以用于调度数据信道和/或参考信号，也可以不用于调度数据信道和/或参考信号，本申请对此不予限制。
在方式四中，第二调度方式的生效时间与终端处理PDCCH的速度有关，而终端处理PDCCH的速度与该PDCCH对应的最小K0值、最小K2值、最小非周期CSI-RS触发偏移值，最小非周期SRS触发偏移值中的一个或者多个取值有关。以终端处理PDCCH的速度与该PDCCH对应的最小K0值有关为例，当最小K0值比较大时，终端处理PDCCH的速度比较慢，第二调度方式的生效时间相对会晚一些；当最小K0值比较小时，终端处理PDCCH的速度比较快，第二调度方式的生效时间相对会早一些。
具体的，第二调度方式的生效时间可以设计为如下述(4.1)或(4.2)所示：
(4.1)第二调度方式的生效时间为第N+M个时隙。
其中，N可以用于表示PDCCH所占用的时隙位置。具体的，N可以为PDCCH所占用的时隙对应的索引号。如：若PDCCH占用的时隙为slot0，则N为0。
如：当每个时隙包括多个符号时，第二调度方式的生效时间为第N+M个时隙可以包括：第二调度方式的生效时间为第N+M个时隙的起始符号，或者，第N+M个符号中其他任意符号，如：可以为第N+M个时隙中第R个符号，R为整数。或者，当每个符号的时间长度为几十us时，第二调度方式的生效时间为第N+M个时隙可以包括：第二调度方式的生效时间为第N+M个时隙中某个符号(如：起始符号或者其他任意符号)的起始时刻，或者，为第N+M个时隙中某个符号中的其他任意时刻，如：可以为第N+M个时隙中某个符号中的第Q个us，Q为整数。
(4.2)第二调度方式的生效时间不早于第N+M个时隙的第一个调度信息监测时机。
其中，调度信息监测时机的相关描述如方式一中所述，不再赘述。
当第一个调度信息监测时机占用多个符号时，第二调度方式的生效时间不早于第N+M个时隙的第一个调度信息监测时机可以包括：第二调度方式的生效时间不早于第N+M个时隙的第一个调度信息监测时机的起始符号，或者，不早于第N+M个时隙的第一个调度信息监测时机中其他任意符号。或者，当第一个调度信息监测时机占用多个符号，每个符号占用几十us时，第二调度方式的生效时间不早于第N+M个时隙的第一个调度信息监测时机可以包括：第二调度方式的生效时间不早于第N+M个时隙的第一个调度信息监测时机中某个符号(如：起始符号或者其他任意符号)的起始时刻，或者，第二调度方式的生效时间不早于第N+M个时隙的第一个调度信息监测时机中某个符号(如：起始符号或者其他任意符号)中的其他任意时刻，本申请对此不予限制。
其中，M根据终端接收切换指示时生效的时隙差的最小值(min value)确定，时隙差指调度数据信道(和/或参考信号)的PDCCH所占用的时隙与该PDCCH所调度的数据信道(和/或参考信号)所占用的时隙之间的时隙差，如：最小值可以为最小K0值，或者，最小K2值，或者最小非周期CSI-RS触发偏移值，或者，最小非周期SRS触发偏移值等。M对应的时隙不早于最小值对应的时隙。示例性的，可以结合网络设备给终端配置的TDRA表格，将最小值指示给终端，如：网络设备可以为终端配置TDRA表格，并向终端指示该TDRA表格中的多个索引值，以便终端从TDRA表格中与多个索引值对应的多个值中确定出最小值。例如，网络设备为终端配置的TDRA表格如上表一所示，网络设备向终端指示TDRA表格中的前三行：index0、index1、index2均生效，则根据查询表一确定最小值为0。
具体的，M与最小值之间的关系可以如下(4.2.1)或者(4.2.2)或者(4.2.3)所述：
(4.2.1)M等于最小值。
当以时隙为粒度定义第二调度方式的生效时间时，第二调度方式的生效时间可以为第N个时隙之后的第N+M个时隙。如：若包括切换指示的PDCCH占用时隙为slot0，最小值为2，则第二调度方式的生效时间为slot2。
需要说明的是，当每个时隙包括多个符号，且以符号为粒度定义第二调度方式的生效时间时，M可以等于最小值与(每个时隙包括的符号个数)的乘积，此时，第二调度方式的生效时间可以为包括切换指示的PDCCH所占用的最后一个符号之后、与包括切换指示的PDCCH所占用的最后一个符号间隔最小值乘以(每个时隙包括的符号个数)个符号的某个符号。如：若包括切换指示的PDCCH占用slot0，且PDCCH所占用的最后一个符号为slot0中的第5个符号，最小值为2，每个时隙包括14个符号，则第二调度方式的生效时间与slot0中的第5个符号间隔28个符号，第二调度方式的生效时间可以为slot2中第10个符号。
(4.2.2)M等于最小值与第一数值之和。
其中，第一数值可以称为生效时间附加时延，第一数值可以以时隙为单位，第一数值可以为1个时隙。第一数值也可以以符号为单位，如：第一数值可以为14个符号或者12个符号等。
当以时隙为粒度定义第二调度方式的生效时间时，第一数值以时隙为单位，第二调度方式的生效时间可以为第N个时隙之后的第(N+最小值+第一数值)个时隙。如：若包括切换指示的PDCCH占用时隙为slot0，最小值为2，第一数值为1，则第二调度方式的生效时间为slot3。
需要说明的是，当每个时隙包括多个符号，且以符号为粒度定义第二调度方式的生效时间时，第一数值以符号为单位，M可以等于最小值乘以(每个时隙包括的符号个数)+第一数值，此时，第二调度方式的生效时间可以为包括切换指示的PDCCH所占用的最后一个符号之后、与包括切换指示的PDCCH所占用的最后一个符号间隔最小值乘以(每个时隙包括的符号个数)+第一数值的某个符号。如：若包括切换指示的PDCCH占用slot0，且PDCCH所占用的最后一个符号为slot0中的第5个符号，最小值为2，每个时隙包括14个符号，第一数值为12个符号，则第二调度方式的生效时间与slot0中的第5个符号间隔40个符号，第二调度方式的生效时间可以为slot3中第8个符号。
(4.2.3)M对应的时隙不早于最小值对应的时隙，且M对应的时隙不早于第二数值对应的时隙。具体的，M可以为第二数值与最小值中的最大值。
其中，第二数值可以称为切换最小值，第二数值与终端自身PDCCH的解调能力有关，终端的解调能力越强，第二数值可能越小，终端的解调能力越弱，第二数值可能越大。第二数值也与终端当前配置的子载波间隔有关，子载波间隔越小，意味着时隙长度越长，第二数值可能越小；子载波间隔越大，意味着时隙长度越短，第二数值可能越大。
第二数值可以以时隙为单位，如：第二数值可以为1(个时隙)或者其他数值。第一数值也可以以符号为单位，如：第一数值可以为14个符号或者12个符号等。
当以时隙为粒度定义第二调度方式的生效时间时，第二数值以时隙为单位，第二调度方式的生效时间可以为第N个时隙之后的第max(第二数值，最小值)个时隙。如：若包括切换指示的PDCCH占用时隙为slot0，最小值为2，第二数值为1，则第二调度方式的生效时间为slot2。
需要说明的是，当每个时隙包括多个符号，且以符号为粒度定义第二调度方式的生效时间时，第二数值以符号为单位，M可以等于max(第二数值，最小值乘以(每个时隙包括的符号个数)，此时，第二调度方式的生效时间可以为包括切换指示的PDCCH所占用的最后一个符号之后、与包括切换指示的PDCCH所占用的最后一个符号间隔max(第二数值，最小值乘以(每个时隙包括的符号个数)个符号的某个符号。如：若包括切换指示的PDCCH占用slot0，且PDCCH所占用的最后一个符号为slot0中的第5个符号，最小值为2，每个时隙包括14个符号，第二数值为12个符号，则第二调度方式的生效时间与slot0中的第5个符号间隔28个符号，第二调度方式的生效时间可以为slot2中第10个符号。
例如，如图9a所示，终端在slot0和slot3监测调度信息，在slot1的第10个符号接收到包括切换指示的PDCCH，并且终端接收到包括切换指示的PDCCH时，生效的最小K0值为0。假设第二数值以时隙为粒度，第二数值为1(符号个数)，M＝max(1，最小K0值) ＝1，则第二调度方式的生效时间可以为第1+1个时隙，即slot2；或者，不早于slot2的第一个调度信息监测时刻生效。或者，假设M＝最小K0值+1＝1，则第二调度方式的生效时间可以为第1+1个时隙，即slot2；或者，不早于slot2的第一个调度信息监测时刻生效。假设第二数值以符号为粒度，第二调度方式的生效时间以符号为粒度，第二数值为5个符号，第一数值为8个符号，每个时隙包括14个符号，则M＝max(5，0)＝5，第二调度方式的生效时间可以为slot2中第1个符号，或者，假设M＝最小K0值乘以每个时隙包括的符号数+8＝8，则第二调度方式的生效时间可以为slot2中第4个符号。
又例如，如图9b所示，其中，终端在slot0、slot2和slot4监测调度信息，在slot1的第10个符号接收到包括切换指示的PDCCH，并且接收到包括切换指示的PDCCH时，生效的最小K0值为2。假设第二数值以时隙为粒度，第二数值为1，M＝max(1，最小K0值)＝2，则第二调度方式的生效时间可以为第1+2个时隙，即slot3；或者，不早于slot3的第一个调度信息监测时刻生效。或者，假设M＝最小K0值+1＝3，则第二调度方式的生效时间仍可以为第1+2个时隙，即slot3；或者，不早于slot3的第一个调度信息监测时刻生效。假设第二数值以符号为粒度，第二调度方式的生效时间以符号为粒度，第二数值为5个符号，第一数值为8个符号，每个时隙包括14个符号，则M＝max(5，2乘以14)＝28，第二调度方式的生效时间可以为slot3中第10个符号，或者，假设M＝最小K0值乘以每个时隙包括的符号数+8＝28+8＝36，则第二调度方式的生效时间可以为slot4中第4个符号。
需要说明的是，在方式四中，当包括切换指示的PDCCH不用于调度数据信道和/或参考信号时，第二调度方式的生效时间与PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的时域位置无关，或者，第二调度方式的生效时间与PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的时域位置有关，第二调度方式的生效时间以PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的时域位置与方式四中所述(4.1)或(4.2)中确定的生效时间中最晚的时间为准，在最晚的时间之后生效第二调度时间。
当包括切换指示的PDCCH用于调度下行数据信道时，第二调度方式的生效时间与PDCCH所调度的下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时域无关，或者，第二调度方式的生效时间与PDCCH所调度的下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时域位置有关，第二调度方式的生效时间以PDCCH所调度的下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时域位置与方式四中所述(4.1)或(4.2)确定的生效时间中最晚的时间为准，在最晚的时间之后生效第二调度时间。
当包括切换指示的PDCCH用于调度上行数据信道时，第二调度方式的生效时间与PDCCH所调度的上行数据信道所占用的时域位置无关，或者，第二调度方式的生效时间与PDCCH所调度的上行数据信道所占用的时域位置有关，第二调度方式的生效时间以PDCCH所调度的上行数据信道所占用的时域位置与方式四中所述(4.1)或(4.2)中确定的生效时间中最晚的时间为准，在最晚的时间之后生效第二调度时间。
方式五、切换指示包括在媒体接入控制控制元(media access control control element，MAC CE)中，MAC CE包括在PDSCH中。
其中，MAC CE包括在PDSCH中还可以描述为MAC CE承载在PDSCH上，或者，MAC CE通过PDSCH发送给终端等，本申请对此不予限制。
在方式五中，为了保证终端接收到MAC CE，进而根据接收到的MAC CE获知切换指示所指示的调度方式，第二调度方式需要在PDSCH的反馈信息所占用的时隙之后生效，如：第二调度方式的生效时间在PDSCH的反馈信息所占用的时隙之后，且第二调度方式的 生效时间与PDSCH的反馈信息所占用的时隙间隔第一时长；或者，描述成第二调度方式的生效时间在PDSCH的反馈信息所占用的时隙之后的第一时长之后。
其中，PDSCH的反馈信息用于指示终端是否正确接收到PDSCH。第一时长与终端的物理层接收到PDSCH到将PDSCH包括的MAC CE传输到终端的MAC层的时间有关。示例性的，第一时长可以等于或大于终端的物理层接收到PDSCH到将PDSCH包括的MAC CE传输到终端的MAC层的时间。例如，第一时长可以为3ms。
方式六、第二调度方式的生效时间为不晚于切换指示的调度信息所调度的数据信道全部传输完毕之后，以此保证数据信道的正常传输。
其中，在方式六中，切换指示可以包括在PDCCH中，该PDCCH可以用于调度数据信道和/或参考信号，也可以不用于调度数据信道和/或参考信号，本申请对此不予限制。数据信道可以为下行数据信道或者上行数据信道，参考信号可以为CSI-RS或者SRS。
具体的，以不晚于切换指示的调度信息为第一调度信息为例，第二调度方式的生效时间可以设计为如(6.1)或(6.2)或(6.3)中所述：
(6.1)第二调度方式的生效时间为第一调度信息调度的数据信道所占用的最后一个符号的下一符号。
其中，第一调度信息调度的数据信道所占用的最后一个符号的下一符号可以为与第一调度信息调度的数据信道所占用的最后一个符号相邻的符号，也可以为第一调度信息调度的数据信道所占用的最后一个符号之后的任意符号，本申请对此不予限制。
其中，本申请实施例所述的符号具有一定的长度，一个符号的时间长度可以为几十us，如：一个符号的时间长度可以为71us。当一个符号的时间长度为几十us时，第二调度方式的生效时间为第一调度信息调度的数据信道所占用的最后一个符号的下一符号可以包括：第二调度方式的生效时间为第一调度信息调度的数据信道所占用的最后一个符号的下一符号的起始时刻，或者，为第一调度信息调度的数据信道所占用的最后一个符号的下一符号中的其他时刻，如：为第一调度信息调度的数据信道所占用的最后一个符号的下一符号的第Q个us，Q为正整数。
例如，以每个时隙包括14个符号，第一调度方式、第二调度方式均为跨时隙调度，但第一调度方式下K0值为2，第二调度方式下K0值为1，调度信息用于调度下行数据信道为例，如图10a所示，终端在slot1监测到切换指示，该切换指示之前(包括切换指示所在的时域位置)存在调度信息1，且调度信息1位于slot0，该调度信息1调用的数据信道位于slot2的第5个符号～第14个符号，则如图10a中虚线所示，第二调度方式的生效时间可以为slot2中第14个符号之后的下一符号，如：可以为slot3中的第1个符号。以每个符号的时间长度71us为例，第二调度方式的生效时间具体可以是slot3中的第1个符号的起始时刻，如：slot3中的第1个符号的第1us，或者，slot3中的第1个符号的第50us，或者，slot3中的第1个符号的第71us，本申请对此不予限制。在图10a中虚线所示位置之前，采用第一调度方式调度下行数据信道，如：虚线之前，调度信息1在slot0，在slot2接收调度信息1调度的下行数据信道，在slot4接收调度信息2调度的下行数据信道，而在虚线之后，在slot5接收调度信息3调度的下行数据信道。
(6.2)第二调度方式的生效时间为第一调度信息调度的数据信道所占用的时隙的下一时隙。
其中，第一调度信息调度的数据信道所占用的时隙的下一时隙可以为与第一调度信息调度的数据信道所占用的时隙之后，与第一调度信息调度的数据信道所占用的时隙相邻的时隙，也可以为第一调度信息调度的数据信道所占用的时隙之后的任意时隙，本申请对此不予限制。
其中，本申请实施例所述的时隙可以包括多个符号，如：一个时隙可以包括12个或者14个符号等。当一个时隙包括多个符号时，第二调度方式的生效时间为第一调度信息调度的数据信道所占用的时隙的下一时隙可以包括：第二调度方式的生效时间为第一调度信息调度的数据信道所占用的时隙的下一时隙的起始符号，或者，为第一调度信息调度的数据信道所占用的时隙的下一时隙中的其他符号，如：第一调度信息调度的数据信道所占用的时隙的下一时隙中第R个符号，R为正整数，或者，当一个时隙包括多个符号，每个符号的时间长度为几十us时，第二调度方式的生效时间为第一调度信息调度的数据信道所占用的时隙的下一时隙可以包括：第二调度方式的生效时间为第一调度信息调度的数据信道所占用的时隙的下一时隙中某个符号(起始符号或者其他任意符号)的起始时刻，或者，第二调度方式的生效时间可以为第一调度信息调度的数据信道所占用的时隙的下一时隙中某个符号(起始符号或者其他任意符号)的其他任意时刻，如：为第一调度信息调度的数据信道所占用的时隙的下一时隙中某个符号(起始符号或者其他任意符号)的第Q个us，Q为整数。
例如，以每个时隙包括14个符号，第一调度方式、第二调度方式均为跨时隙调度，但第一调度方式下K0值为2，第二调度方式下K0值为1，调度信息用于调度下行数据信道为例，如图10b所示，终端在slot1监测到切换指示，该切换指示之前(包括切换指示所在的时域位置)存在调度信息1，且调度信息1位于slot0，该调度信息1调用的数据信道位于slot2的第5个符号～第10个符号，则如图10b中虚线所示，第二调度方式的生效时间可以是slot2的下一时隙，如可以是slot3的起始时刻。具体的，当slot包括14个符号时，第二调度方式的生效时间可以是slot3中的起始符号，如：slot3中的第1个符号，也可以是slot3中第10个符号，还可以是slot3中第14个符号等，或者，当每个符号的时间长度为几十us时，第二调度方式的生效时间可以是slot3中第1个符号的起始时刻，如：可以是slot3中第1个符号的第1us，也可以是slot3中第1个符号中的第10us，还可以是slot3中第1个符号的第71us等。在图10b中虚线所示位置之前，采用第一调度方式调度下行数据信道，如：虚线之前，调度信息1在slot0，在slot2接收调度信息1调度的下行数据信道，在slot4接收调度信息2调度的下行数据信道，而在虚线之后，在slot5接收调度信息3调度的下行数据信道。
(6.3)第二调度方式的生效时间为第一调度信息调度的数据信道所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机。
其中，调度信息监测时机的相关描述如方式一中所述，不再赘述。需要说明的是，在
(6.3)中，第一调度信息调度的数据信道所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机可以为第一调度信息调度的数据信道所占用的时域位置之后、第一次出现的调度信息监测时机，也可以为第一调度信息调度的数据信道所占用的时域位置之后其他任意调度信息监测时机，如：可以为第一调度信息调度的数据信道所占用的时域位置之后第N个调度信息监测时机，N为正整数。
为了避免终端因无法监测调度数据信道的PDCCH，导致数据信道无法正确传输的问题，第二调度方式在第一调度信息调度的数据信道所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机到来之时开始生效。
当第一个调度信息监测时机占用多个符号时，第二调度方式的生效时间为第一调度信息调度的数据信道所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机可以包括：第二调度方式的生效时间为第一调度信息调度的数据信道所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机的起始符号，或者，为第一调度信息调度的数据信道所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机中其他任意符号。或者，当第一个调度信息监测时机占用多个符号，每个符号占用几十us时，第二调度方式的生效时间为第一调度信息调度的数据信道所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机可以包括：第二调度方式的生效时间为第一调度信息调度的数据信道所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机中某个符号(如：起始符号或者其他任意符号)的起始时刻，或者，第二调度方式的生效时间为第一调度信息调度的数据信道所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机中某个符号(如：起始符号或者其他任意符号)中的其他任意时刻，本申请对此不予限制。
例如，以每个时隙包括14个符号，第一调度方式、第二调度方式均为跨时隙调度，但第一调度方式下K0值为2，第二调度方式下K0值为1，调度信息用于调度下行数据信道为例，如图10c所示，终端在slot1监测到切换指示，该切换指示之前(包括切换指示所在的时域位置)存在调度信息1，且调度信息1位于slot0，该调度信息1调用的数据信道位于slot2的第5个符号～第10个符号，调度信息1调用的数据信道所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机(调度信息3)位于第slot4，如图10c中虚线所示，第二调度方式的生效时间可以是slot4的起始时刻。具体的，当slot包括14个符号时，第二调度方式的生效时间可以是slot4中的起始符号，如：slot4中的第1个符号，也可以是slot4中第10个符号，还可以是slot4中第14个符号等，或者，当每个符号的时间长度为几十us时，第二调度方式的生效时间可以是slot4中第1个符号的起始时刻，如：可以是slot4中第1个符号的第1us，也可以是slot4中第1个符号中的第10us，还可以是slot4中第1个符号的第71us等。在图10c中虚线所示位置之前，采用第一调度方式调度下行数据信道，如：虚线之前，调度信息1在slot0，在slot2接收调度信息1调度的下行数据信道，在slot4接收调度信息2调度的下行数据信道，而在虚线之后，在slot5接收调度信息3调度的下行数据信道。
在方式六中，在调度信息调度下行数据信道时，为了保证下行数据信道传输的可靠性，终端还需要在调度信息所调度的下行数据信道的反馈信息发送之后生效第二调度方式，具体的，第二调度方式的生效时间可以为下述(6.4)或(6.5)或(6.6)中所述：
(6.4)第二调度方式的生效时间为第一调度信息调度的下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的最后一个符号的下一符号。
其中，第一调度信息调度的下行数据信道的反馈信号所占用的最后一个符号的下一符号可以为与第一调度信息调度的下行数据信道的反馈信号所占用的最后一个符号相邻的符号，也可以为第一调度信息调度的下行数据信道的反馈信号所占用的最后一个符号之后的任意符号，本申请对此不予限制。
其中，本申请实施例所述的符号具有一定的长度，一个符号的时间长度可以为几十us，如：一个符号的时间长度可以为71us。当一个符号的时间长度为几十us时，第二调度方式 的生效时间为第一调度信息调度的下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的最后一个符号的下一符号可以包括：第二调度方式的生效时间为第一调度信息调度的下行数据信道的反馈信号所占用的最后一个符号的下一符号的起始时刻，或者，为第一调度信息调度的下行数据信道的反馈信号所占用的最后一个符号的下一符号中的其他任意时刻，如：可以为第一调度信息调度的下行数据信道的反馈信号所占用的最后一个符号的下一符号的第Q个us，Q为正整数。
例如，以每个时隙包括14个符号，第一调度方式、第二调度方式均为跨时隙调度，但第一调度方式下K0值为2，第二调度方式下K0值为1，调度信息用于调度下行数据信道为例，如图11a所示，终端在slot1监测到切换指示，该切换指示之前(包括切换指示所在的时域位置)存在调度信息1，且调度信息1位于slot0，该调度信息1调用的下行数据信道位于slot2的第1个符号～第7个符号，下行数据信道的反馈信息位于solt2的第12个符号，则如图11a中虚线所示，第二调度方式的生效时间可以为slot2中第12个符号之后的下一符号，如：可以为slot2中的第13个符号。以每个符号的时间长度为71us为例，第二调度方式的生效时间具体可以是slot2中的第13个符号的起始时刻，如slot2中的第13个符号的第1us，或者，slot2中的第13个符号的第50us，或者，slot2中的第13个符号的第71us，本申请对此不予限制。在图11a中虚线所示位置之前，采用第一调度方式调度下行数据信道，如：虚线之前，调度信息1在slot0，在slot2接收调度信息1调度的下行数据信道，在slot4接收调度信息2调度的下行数据信道，而在虚线之后，在slot5接收调度信息3调度的下行数据信道。
(6.5)第二调度方式的生效时间为第一调度信息调度的下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时隙的下一时隙。
其中，第一调度信息调度的下行数据信道的反馈信号所占用的时隙的下一时隙可以为与第一调度信息调度的下行数据信道的反馈信号所占用的时隙之后，与第一调度信息调度的下行数据信道的反馈信号所占用的时隙相邻的时隙，也可以为第一调度信息调度的下行数据信道的反馈信号所占用的时隙之后的任意时隙，本申请对此不予限制。
其中，本申请实施例所述的时隙可以包括多个符号，如：一个时隙可以包括12个或者14个符号等。当一个时隙包括多个符号时，第二调度方式的生效时间为第一调度信息调度的下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时隙的下一时隙可以包括：第二调度方式的生效时间为第一调度信息调度的下行数据信道的反馈信号所占用的时隙的下一时隙的起始符号，或者，为第一调度信息调度的下行数据信道的反馈信号所占用的时隙的下一时隙中的其他符号，如：第一调度信息调度的下行数据信道的反馈信号所占用的时隙的下一时隙中第R个符号，R为正整数。或者，当一个时隙包括多个符号，一个符号的时间长度为几十us时，第二调度方式的生效时间为第一调度信息调度的下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时隙的下一时隙可以包括：第二调度方式的生效时间为第一调度信息调度的下行数据信道的反馈信号所占用的时隙的下一时隙中某个符号(起始符号或其他任意符号)的起始时刻，或者，第二调度方式的生效时间可以为第一调度信息调度的下行数据信道的反馈信号所占用的时隙的下一时隙中某个符号(起始符号或其他任意符号)的任意时刻，如：某个符号(起始符号或其他任意符号)的第Q个us，Q为整数等。
例如，以每个时隙包括14个符号，第一调度方式、第二调度方式均为跨时隙调度，但 第一调度方式下K0值为2，第二调度方式下K0值为1，调度信息用于调度下行数据信道为例，如图11b所示，终端在slot1监测到切换指示，该切换指示之前(包括切换指示所在的时域位置)存在调度信息1，且调度信息1位于slot0，该调度信息1调用的下行数据信道位于slot2的第1个符号～第7个符号，下行数据信道的反馈信息位于solt2的第12个符号，则如图11b中虚线所示，第二调度方式的生效时间可以是slot2的下一时隙，如可以是slot3的起始时刻。具体的，当slot包括14个符号时，第二调度方式的生效时间可以是slot3中的起始符号，如：slot3中的第1个符号，也可以是slot3中第10个符号，还可以是slot3中第14个符号等，或者，当每个符号的时间长度为几十us时，第二调度方式的生效时间可以是slot3中第1个符号的起始时刻，如：可以是slot3中第1个符号的第1us，也可以是slot3中第1个符号中的第10us，还可以是slot3中第1个符号的第71us等。在图11b中虚线所示位置之前，采用第一调度方式调度下行数据信道，如：虚线之前，调度信息1在slot0，在slot2接收调度信息1调度的下行数据信道，在slot4接收调度信息2调度的下行数据信道，而在虚线之后，在slot5接收调度信息3调度的下行数据信道。
(6.6)第二调度方式的生效时间为第一调度信息调度的下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机。
其中，调度信息监测时机的相关描述如方式一中所述，不再赘述。需要说明的是，在(6.6)中，第一调度信息调度的下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机可以为第一调度信息调度的下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时域位置之后、第一次出现的调度信息监测时机，也可以为第一调度信息调度的下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时域位置之后其他任意调度信息监测时机，如：可以为第一调度信息调度的下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时域位置之后第N个调度信息监测时机，N为正整数。
为了避免终端因无法监测调度数据信道的PDCCH，导致数据信道无法正确传输的问题，第二调度方式在第一调度信息调度的下行数据信道的反馈信号所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机到来之时开始生效。
当第一个调度信息监测时机占用多个符号时，第二调度方式的生效时间为第一调度信息调度的下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机可以包括：第二调度方式的生效时间为第一调度信息调度的下行数据信道的反馈信号所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机的起始符号，或者，为第一调度信息调度的下行数据信道的反馈信号所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机中其他任意符号。或者，当第一个调度信息监测时机占用多个符号，每个符号占用几十us时，第二调度方式的生效时间为第一调度信息调度的下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机可以包括：第二调度方式的生效时间为第一调度信息调度的下行数据信道的反馈信号所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机中某个符号(如：起始符号或者其他任意符号)的起始时刻，或者，第二调度方式的生效时间为第一调度信息调度的下行数据信道的反馈信号所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机中某个符号(如：起始符号或者其他任意符号)中的其他任意时刻，本申请对此不予限制。
例如，以每个时隙包括14个符号，第一调度方式、第二调度方式均为跨时隙调度，但第一调度方式下K0值为2，第二调度方式下K0值为1，调度信息用于调度下行数据信道为例，如图11c所示，终端在slot1监测到切换指示，该切换指示之前(包括切换指示所在的 时域位置)存在调度信息1，且调度信息1位于slot0，该调度信息1调用的下行数据信道位于slot2的第1个符号～第7个符号，下行数据信道的反馈信息位于solt2的第14个符号，下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机(调度信息3)位于slot4，如图11c中虚线所示，第二调度方式的生效时间可以是slot4的起始时刻。具体的，当slot包括14个符号时，第二调度方式的生效时间可以是slot4中的起始符号，如：slot4中的第1个符号，也可以是slot4中第10个符号，还可以是slot4中第14个符号等，或者，当每个符号的时间长度为几十us时，第二调度方式的生效时间可以是slot4中第1个符号的起始时刻，如：可以是slot4中第1个符号的第1us，也可以是slot4中第1个符号中的第10us，还可以是slot4中第1个符号的第71us等。在图11c中虚线所示位置之前，采用第一调度方式调度下行数据信道，如：虚线之前，调度信息1在slot0，在slot2接收调度信息1调度的下行数据信道，在slot4接收调度信息2调度的下行数据信道，而在虚线之后，在slot5接收调度信息3调度的下行数据信道。
其中，在方式六中，第一调度信息具体可以为不晚于切换指示的所有调度信息中，调度的下行数据信道是最晚传输的下行数据信道的调度信息，如此，才能保证在不晚于切换指示的调度信息所调度的下行数据信道全部传输完成之后生效第二调度方式。
需要说明的是，方式一～方式六所述的确定第二调度方式的生效时间的规则可以预先在协议中规定好，一旦终端接收到包括切换指示的PDCCH，终端就可以通过查找协议，按照协议规定确定第二调度方式的生效时间。此外，上述方式一～方式六中任一种或者多种方式可以组合起来确定第二调度方式的生效时间，即可以将方式一～方式六中任一种或者多种方式确定的时间中最晚的时间作为第二调度方式的生效时间。例如，可以将方式一中(1.1)所示时间、方式二中(2.1)所示时间、方式四中(4.1)所示时间中的最晚时间作为第二调度方式的生效时间等。或者，将方式一中(1.1)所示时间、方式二中(2.1)所示时间、方式三中(3.1)、方式四中(4.1)所示时间、方式五中所示时间、方式六中(6.1)所示时间中的最晚时间作为第二调度方式的生效时间等。
除上述方式一～方式六之外，还可以由网络设备通过动态信令向终端指示第二调度方式的生效时间，如下述方式七所述：
方式七、终端接收网络设备发送的生效指示，该生效指示可以用于指示第二调度方式的生效时间；终端根据生效指示，确定第二调度方式的生效时间。
其中，生效指示可以包括在PDCCH或者PDSCH中，如：生效指示可以为PDCCH中的DCI或者包括在PDCCH中的DCI中，或者，生效指示可以为PDSCH中的MAC CE或者包括在PDSCH中的MAC CE中，本申请对此不予限制。
如此，可以由网络设备为终端指示第二调度方式的生效时间，简单易行。
需要说明的是，在本申请实施例中，终端确定第二调度方式的生效时间之后，可以在第二调度方式的生效时间到来之时或者第二调度方式的生效时间之后，采用第二调度方式调度数据信道和/或参考信号，直至终端再次接收到新的切换指示，且新的切换指示用于指示终端从第二调度方式切换到第一调度方式时，终端才终止第二调度方式。
上述方案确定第二调度方式的生效时间的方法可以适用于终端工作的BWP的子载波间隔不变的场景。实际应用中，终端工作的BWP(上行BWP和/或者下行BWP)会发生切换，且切换后的BWP的numerology与切换前的BWP的numerology可能不同，切换后的BWP 的子载波间隔与切换前的BWP子载波间隔可能会不同。
因BWP的子载波间隔不同时，BWP对应的时隙长度是不同的，在终端的调度方式发生切换的同时，若终端工作的BWP也发生切换，则需要根据BWP的系统参数对前述方式确定出的生效时间进行调整得到第二调度方式的生效时间。具体的，确定第二调度方式的生效时间的过程如下所述：
当上述步骤501中的切换指示包括在PDCCH中，且该切换指示还用于指示终端从第一BWP切换到第二BWP时，终端根据PDCCH所在时隙N、生效的最小时隙间隔以及目标系数，确定在目标BWP上，第二调度方式的生效时间。
其中，生效的最小时隙间隔可以指终端接收切换指示时生效的最小K0值。
其中，N为自然数，如：N可以为0或者1等等。
其中，目标系数根据目标BWP的numerology与第一下行BWP的numerology确定，第一下行BWP为终端接收切换指示时激活的下行BWP。
其中，目标BWP可以为上行BWP，也可以为下行BWP。当第二调度方式用于指示PDCCH所在时隙与PDCCH调度的上行数据信道的时隙间的间隔时，目标BWP为上行BWP；当第二调度方式用于指示PDCCH所在时隙与PDCCH调度的下行数据信道的时隙间的间隔时，目标BWP为下行BWP。
示例性的，可以根据调度方式以及BWP的切换情况确定目标BWP，如：
第一BWP为第一下行BWP，第二BWP为第二下行BWP；第一调度方式为第一下行调度方式，第二调度方式为第二下行调度方式；目标BWP为第二下行BWP；或者，
第一BWP为第一下行BWP，第二BWP为第二下行BWP；第一调度方式为第一上行调度方式，第二调度方式为第二上行调度方式；目标BWP为第一上行BWP；或者，
第一BWP为第一上行BWP，第二BWP为第二上行BWP；第一调度方式为第一下行调度方式，第二调度方式为第二下行调度方式；目标BWP为第一下行BWP；或者，
第一BWP为第一上行BWP，第二BWP为第二上行BWP；第一调度方式为第一上行调度方式，第二调度方式为第二上行调度方式；目标BWP为第二上行BWP。
示例性的，目标系数可以等于
Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-100001
其中μ T为目标BWP的参数numerology，μ 1为第一下行BWP的numerology。或者，可以描述为目标系数等于
Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-100002
等，不予限制。
示例性的，第二调度方式的生效时间不早于第Q个时隙，如：第二调度方式的生效时间可以为第Q个时隙的起始位置或者第Q个时隙的起始符号，或者，第二调度方式的生效时间可以为第Q个时隙中的其他任意符号或者第Q个时隙后的其他时隙等等，不予限制。
其中，Q等于
Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-100003
M等于生效的最小时隙间隔；或者，M等于生效的最小时隙间隔与第一数值之和；或者，M为第二数值与生效的最小时隙间隔中的最大值。
如前所述，第一数值可以为1，第二数值可以为1，M＝最小K0值，或者，M＝max[1，最小K0值]，或者，M＝最小K0值+1。
需要说明的是，终端可以参照上述方式，确定在上行调度方式、下行调度方式、以及上行BWP、下行BWP均切换的场景下，切换后的调度方式的生效时间，不予赘述。
下面以M＝max[1，最小K0值]为例，结合下述情况一～情况五，对终端的调度方式、终 端工作的BWP均发生切换的场景下，调度方式的生效时间进行描述：
情况一：终端从网络设备接收到的切换指示用于指示终端从第一下行调度方式切换到第二下行调度方式，以及，用于指示终端从第一下行BWP切换到第二下行BWP。
终端确定第二下行调度方式的生效时间包括：终端根据PDCCH所在时隙N、生效的最小时隙间隔以及系数
Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-100004
确定在第二下行BWP上，第二下行调度方式的生效时间。
如：第二下行调度方式的生效时间不早于第
Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-100005
个时隙，即终端会在第二下行BWP上不早于时隙
Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-100006
使用第二下行调度方式。
其中，K0 min为终端在第一下行BWP上接收切换指示时生效的K0最小值，μ DL,new为第二下行BWP的numerology，μ DL,old为第一下行BWP的numerology。
Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-100007
表示向上取整。
例如，终端当前激活的下行BWP为DL BWP1，DL BWP1的numerology为1，DL BWP1的子载波间隔为30kHz。若终端在时隙n上接收到包括切换指示的PDCCH，该切换指示仅用于指示终端从第一下行调度方式切换到第二下行调度方式(如：指示一个新的最小K0值)，而未指示BWP切换，假设终端当前生效的最小K0值为2，则如图11d所示，DL BWP1上，第二下行调度方式的生效时间不早于第n+max(1，2)个时隙，如：可以为第n+2个时隙的起始位置。若该切换指示还用于指示终端从DL BWP1切换到DL BWP2，且DL BWP2的numerology为0，DL BWP1的子载波间隔为15kHz，因DL BWP2的时隙长度为DL BWP1的长度的两倍，则如图11d所示，在DL BWP2上，第二下行调度方式的生效时间为第
Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-100008
个时隙，如：为DL BWP2上，第
Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-100009
个时隙的起始位置。
又例如，假设终端当前生效的最小K0值为3，则如图11d所示，DL BWP1上，第二下行调度方式的生效时间为第n+max(1，3)个时隙，如：可以为第n+3个时隙的起始位置。若该切换指示还用于指示终端从DL BWP1切换到DL BWP2，且DL BWP2的numerology为0，DL BWP1的子载波间隔为15kHz，因DL BWP2的时隙长度为DL BWP1的长度的两倍，则如图11d所示，在DL BWP2上，第二下行调度方式的生效时间为第
Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-100010
个时隙，如：为DL BWP2上，第
Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-100011
个时隙的起始位置。
情况二：终端从网络设备接收到的切换指示用于指示终端从第一上行调度方式切换到第二上行调度方式，以及，用于指示终端从第一上行BWP切换到第二上行BWP。
终端确定第二上行调度方式的生效时间包括：终端根据PDCCH所在时隙N、生效的最小时隙间隔以及系数
Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-100012
确定在第二上行BWP上，第二上行调度方式的生效时间。
如：第二上行调度方式的生效时间不早于第
Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-100013
个时隙，即终端会在第二上行BWP上不早于时隙
Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-100014
使用第二上行调度方式。
其中，K0 min为终端在第一下行BWP上接收切换指示时生效的K0最小值，μ UL,new为第二上行BWP的numerology，μ DL,old为第一下行BWP的numerology。
Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-100015
表示向上取整。
例如，终端当前激活的上行BWP为UL BWP1，下行BWP为DL BWP1，UL BWP1以及DL BWP1的numerology为1，子载波间隔为30kHz。若终端在时隙n上接收到包括切换指示的PDCCH，该切换指示仅用于指示终端从第一上行调度方式切换到第二上行调度方式(如：指示一个新的最小K2值)，而未指示BWP切换，假设终端当前生效的最小K0值为2，则如图11e所示，UL BWP1上，第二上行调度方式的生效时间不早于第n+2个时隙，如：可以为第n+2个时隙的起始位置。若该切换指示还用于指示终端从UL BWP1切换到UL BWP2，且UL BWP2的numerology为0，UL BWP1的子载波间隔为15kHz，因UL BWP2的时隙长度为UL BWP1的长度的两倍，则如图11e所示，在UL BWP2上，第二上行调度方式的生效时间为第
Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-100016
个时隙，如：为UL BWP2上，第
Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-100017
个时隙的起始位置。
又例如，假设终端当前生效的最小K0值为3，则如图11d所示，UL BWP1上，第二上行调度方式的生效时间为第n+3个时隙，如：可以为第n+3个时隙的起始位置。若该切换指示还用于指示终端从UL BWP1切换到UL BWP2，且UL BWP2的numerology为0，UL BWP1的子载波间隔为15kHz，因UL BWP2的时隙长度为UL BWP1的长度的两倍，则如图11d所示，在UL BWP2上，第二上行调度方式的生效时间为第
Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-100018
个时隙，如：可以为UL BWP2上，第
Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-100019
个时隙的起始位置。
情况三：切换指示用于指示终端从第一下行调度方式切换到第二下行调度方式，以及，用于指示终端从第一上行BWP切换到第二上行BWP。
情况三下，网络设备指示下行调度方式的切换以及指示上行BWP的切换，此时，下行BWP未切换，终端工作的下行BWP仍为终端接收切换指示时激活的第一下行BWP，因此，终端确定第二下行调度方式的生效时间包括：终端根据PDCCH所在时隙N、生效的最小时隙间隔以及系数
Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-100020
确定在第一下行BWP上，第二下行调度方式的生效时间。
如：第二上行调度方式的生效时间不早于第一下行BWP的第
Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-100021
个时隙，其中，
Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-100022
即终端会在第一下行BWP上不早于时隙N+max(1,K0 min)使用第二下行调度方式。
其中，K0 min为终端在第一下行BWP上接收切换指示时生效的K0最小值，μ DL,old为第一下行BWP的numerology。
在情况三下，切换指示还可以用于指示终端从第一上行调度方式切换到第二上行调度方式，此时，可以参照情况二所述确定第二上行调度方式的生效时间。如：终端确定第二上行调度方式的生效时间包括：终端根据PDCCH所在时隙N、生效的最小时隙间隔以及系数
Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-100023
确定第二上行BWP上第二上行调度方式的生效时间。
具体的，第二上行调度方式的生效时间不早于第
Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-100024
个时隙，即终端会在第二上行BWP上不早于时隙
Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-100025
使用第二下行调度方式。
情况四：切换指示用于指示终端从第一上行调度方式切换到第二上行调度方式，以及，用于指示终端从第一下行BWP切换到第二下行BWP。
情况四下，网络设备指示上行调度方式的切换以及指示下行BWP的切换，此时，上行BWP未切换，终端工作的上行BWP仍为终端接收切换指示时激活的第一上行BWP，因此，终端确定第二上行调度方式的生效时间包括：终端根据PDCCH所在时隙N、生效的最小时隙间隔以及系数
Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-100026
确定在第一上行BWP上，第二上行调度方式的生效时间。
如：第二上行调度方式的生效时间不早于第一上行BWP的第
Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-100027
个时隙，即终端会在第一上行BWP上不早于时隙
Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-100028
使用第二上行调度方式。
其中，K0 min为生效的K0最小值，μ DL,old为第一下行BWP的numerology，μ UL,old为第一上行BWP的numerology。
在情况四下，切换指示还可以用于指示终端从第一下行调度方式切换到第二下行调度方式，此时，终端可以参照情况一确定第二下行调度方式的生效时间包括：终端根据PDCCH所在时隙N、生效的最小时隙间隔以及系数
Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-100029
确定第二下行BWP上第二下行调度方式的生效时间
如：第二下行调度方式的生效时间不早于第
Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-100030
个时隙，即终端会在第二下行BWP上不早于时隙
Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-100031
使用第二下行调度方式。
情况五：终端从第一下行调度方式切换到第二下行调度方式，从第一下行BWP切换到第二下行BWP、以及从第一上行调度方式切换到第二上行调度方式，从第一上行BWP切换到第二上行BWP。
终端可以根据PDCCH所在时隙N、生效的最小时隙间隔以及系数
Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-100032
确定在第二下行BWP上，第二下行调度方式的生效时间，以及，根据PDCCH所在时隙N、生效的最小时隙间隔以及系数
Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-100033
确定在第二上行BWP上，第二上行调度方式的生效时间。
即可参照情况一和情况二所述过程确定第二下行调度方式的生效时间以及第二上行调度方式的生效时间，不予赘述。
需要说明的是，情况一～情况五中，终端可以位于频分双工(frequency division duplexing,FDD)系统，情况五中，终端可以位于时分双工(time division duplexing，TDD)系统。其中，TDD系统下，上行BWP和下行BWP是成对切换的，一旦上行BWP切换，则下行BWP一定会切换，即同一时刻，若上行BWP切换，则下行BWP也必然切换。而FDD系统下，上行BWP和下行BWP切换是解耦的，同一时刻，可以上行BWP切换或者下行BWP切换。
此外，本申请实施例不限定网络设备向终端指示的内容，除指示终端切换调度方式和/或切换BWP之外，网络设备向终端发送的切换指示还可以用于指示下述一种或者多种参 数：终端的PDCCH跳过(skipping)、终端监测PDCCH的周期、终端的多输入多输出(multi-input multi-out，MIMO)参数、终端监测的搜索空间和/CORESET等，终端接收到网络设备指示的这一种或者多种参数后，可以确定这些参数的生效时间，并在确定的生效时间到来之时使用这些参数。
具体的，上述一种或者多种参数的生效时间可以与第二调度方式的生效时间相同。如：当终端的BWP无切换时，上述一种或者多种参数的生效时间可以为不早于第N+max(1，最小K0值)个时隙，N为终端接收到到包括切换指示的PDCCH所在的时隙。
其中，PDCCH skipping可以指终端跳过一个或多个时隙/子帧/监测时机(monitor occasion，MO)监测调度数据的PDCCH。
终端监测PDCCH的周期可以指终端监测调度数据的PDCCH的周期。
终端的MIMO参数可以指终端的发送/接收的天线(antenna)数，或天线端口(antenna port)数，或传输层(layer)数，或最大传输层数。
终端监测的搜索空间(search space)和/CORESET可以指终端监测调度数据的PDCCH需要监测的CORESET和/或搜索空间。
本申请实施例中，网络设备可以将BWP上的最小时隙间隔指示给终端，以便终端根据网络设备的指示调度数据信道。具体的，该过程可以包括：
终端接收网络设备发送的最小时隙间隔指示信息，最小时隙间隔指示信息用于指示目标BWP的最小时隙间隔；终端根据最小时隙间隔指示信息以及目标BWP的numerology，确定目标BWP的最小时隙间隔，目标BWP的最小时隙间隔基于目标BWP的numerology。
其中，目标BWP可以为上行BWP，也可以为下行BWP，不予限制。此外，目标BWP可以为终端接收最小时隙间隔指示信息时激活的上行BWP或者下行BWP，也可以为终端待切换到的上行BWP或者下行BWP。
其中，目标BWP的最小时隙间隔可以指PDCCH所在时隙与PDCCH在目标BWP上调度的数据信道所在的时隙间的时隙间隔。当目标BWP为上行BWP时，目标BWP的最小时隙间隔为PDCCH所在时隙与PDCCH在上行BWP上调度的上行数据信道所在的时隙间的时隙间隔。当目标BWP为下行BWP时，目标BWP的最小时隙间隔为PDCCH所在时隙与PDCCH在下行BWP上调度的下行数据信道所在的时隙间的时隙间隔。
其中，目标BWP的最小时隙间隔基于目标BWP的numerology还可以描述为目标BWP的最小时隙间隔与目标BWP的numerology对应，或者，目标BWP的最小时隙间隔与目标BWP的numerology关联，或者，目标BWP的最小时隙间隔与目标BWP的numerology相关，或者目标BWP的最小时隙间隔以目标BWP的numerology作为参考等等。
其中，终端最终确定出的目标BWP的最小时隙间隔可以指目标BWP上PDCCH所在时隙与PDCCH调度的数据信道所在时隙之间间隔的时长，终端最终确定出的目标BWP的最小时隙间隔的单位可以为ms。
例如，假设目标BWP的numerology为1，目标BWP的子载波间隔为30kHz，目标BWP的一个时隙长度为0.5ms，此时，若最小时隙间隔指示信息指示的目标BWP的最小时隙间隔为2个时隙，则终端根据最小时隙间隔指示信息以及目标BWP的系统参数numerology，可以确定目标BWP的最小时隙间隔为2*0.5ms＝1ms。
一种可能的设计中，最小时隙间隔指示信息包括目标BWP的最小时隙间隔对应的数 值，即网络设备可以直接将最小时隙间隔的取值指示给终端，以便终端直接根据目标BWP的最小时隙间隔的取值以及目标BWP的numerology，确定目标BWP的最小时隙间隔。
其中，目标BWP的最小时隙间隔的取值可以指目标BWP上PDCCH所在时隙与PDCCH调度的数据信道所在时隙之间间隔的时隙的个数。如：当目标BWP为下行BWP时，网络设备可以将最小K0值指示给终端，当目标BWP为上行BWP时，网络设备可以将最小K2值指示给终端。
需要说明的是，本申请实施例不限于通过K0值或者K2值指示目标BWP的最小时隙间隔，还可以通过其他方式间接指示BWP的最小时隙间隔，具体的，其他方式可参照下述几种可能的设计中所述。
又一种可能的设计中，最小时隙间隔指示信息包括参考最小时隙间隔对应的数值；终端根据最小时隙间隔指示信息以及目标BWP的numerology，确定目标BWP的最小时隙间隔，包括：终端根据参考最小时隙间隔对应的数值、参考numerology以及目标BWP的numerology，确定目标BWP的最小时隙间隔。
其中，参考最小时隙间隔对应的数值可以为与参考numerology对应的最小时隙间隔的取值，或者，可以描述为参考最小时隙间隔对应的数值为与参考BWP对应的最小时隙间隔的取值。当目标BWP为上行BWP时，参考最小时隙间隔的取值可以为参考最小K0值，当目标BWP为下行BWP时，参考最小时隙间隔的取值可以为最小K2值。
示例性的，终端可以根据参考最小时隙间隔对应的数值与系数
Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-100034
的乘积确定目标BWP上PDCCH所在时隙与PDCCH调度的数据信道所在时隙之间间隔的时隙的个数，再根据目标BWP上PDCCH所在时隙与PDCCH调度的数据信道所在时隙之间间隔的时隙的个数以及目标BWP的numerology，确定目标BWP上PDCCH所在时隙与PDCCH调度的数据信道所在时隙之间间隔的时长。
其中，μ 目标为目标BWP的numerology，μ 参考为参考numerology。
例如，若参考最小时隙间隔为参考的最小K0值＝2，参考numerology为1，目标BWP的numerology为0，则目标BWP的最小时隙间隔为
Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-100035
个时隙，因目标BWP的numerology为0，目标BWP上一个时隙为1ms，则目标BWP的最小时隙间隔为1ms。
再一种可能的设计中，最小时隙间隔指示信息包括第一索引值，终端根据最小时隙间隔指示信息以及目标BWP的numerology，确定目标BWP的最小时隙间隔，包括：终端根据第一索引值、第一对应关系以及目标BWP的numerology，确定目标BWP的最小时隙间隔。
如：终端可以先根据第一索引值以及第一对应关系确定目标BWP的最小时隙间隔对应的时隙数，再根据目标BWP的最小时隙间隔对应的时隙数以及目标BWP的numerology，确定目标BWP的最小时隙间隔对应的时长。
其中，第一对应关系包括索引值与BWP的最小时隙间隔的对应关系。第一对应关系包括的最小时隙间隔可以为下行BWP的最小时隙间隔，也可以为上行BWP的最小时隙间隔，不予限制。如：第一对应关系包括的BWP的最小时隙间隔可以为下行BWP的最小K0值，也可以为上行BWP的最小K2值。
其中，第一对应关系可以为数组形式的对应关系，还可以为列表形式的对应关系。如：第一对应关系可以为数组：索引值0{BWP1的最小K0值为0，BWP2的最小K0值为0}、 索引值1{BWP1的最小K0值为2，BWP2的最小K0值为1}，或者，第一对应关系如下表三所示，不予限制。
例如，以第一对应关系为列表形式的对应关系，第一对应关系中的BWP的最小时隙间隔为下行BWP的最小K0值为例，如下表三所示，索引值为0时，对应的DL BWP1的最小K0值为0，对应的DL BWP2的最小K0值为0；索引值为1时，对应的DL BWP1的最小K0值为2，对应的DL BWP2的最小K0值为1；索引值为2时，对应的DL BWP1的最小K0值为3，对应的DL BWP2的最小K0值为2。若目标BWP为DL BWP2，DL BWP2的numerology为1，DL BWP2上一个时隙长度为0.5ms，最小时隙间隔指示信息包括的第一索引值为1，则以索引值1为索引，查询表三，确定DL BWP2的最小K0值为1，根据DL BWP2的numerology以及DL BWP2的最小K0值确定DL BWP2的最小时隙间隔为0.5ms。
表三
索引值 DL BWP1的最小K0值 DL BWP2的最小K0值
0 0 0
1 2 1
2 3 2
又例如，以第一对应关系为列表形式的对应关系，第一对应关系中的BWP的最小时隙间隔为上行BWP的最小K2值为例，如下表四所示，索引值为0时，对应的UL BWP1的最小K2值为1，对应的UL BWP2的最小K2值为2；索引值为1时，对应的UL BWP1的最小K2值为2，对应的UL BWP2的最小K2值为3。若目标BWP为UL BWP2，UL BWP2的numerology为1，UL BWP2上一个时隙长度为0.5ms，最小时隙间隔指示信息包括的第一索引值为1，则以索引值1为索引，查询表四，确定UL BWP2的最小K2值为3，根据UL BWP2的numerology以及UL BWP2的最小K2值确定UL BWP2的最小时隙间隔为0.5ms*3＝1.5ms。
表四
索引值 UL BWP1的最小K2值 UL BWP2的最小K2值
0 1 2
1 2 3
需要说明的是，表三、表四仅为示例性表格，除表三所示BWP1的最小K0值以及BWP2的最小K0值，表三中还可以包括其他一个或者多个BWP的最小值。或者，表三可以拆分为两个表格，每个表格中仅包括索引值与一个BWP的最小K0值的对应关系，不予限制。同理，除表四所示BWP1的最小K0值以及BWP2的最小K0值，表四中还可以包括其他一个或者多个BWP的最小值。或者，表四可以拆分为两个表格，每个表格中仅包括索引值与一个BWP的最小K0值的对应关系，不予限制。
再一种可能的设计中，最小时隙间隔指示信息包括第二索引值；终端根据最小时隙间隔指示信息以及目标BWP的numerology，确定目标BWP的最小时隙间隔，包括：
终端根据第二索引值，第二对应关系、参考numerology以及目标BWP的numerology，确定目标BWP的最小时隙间隔。
如：终端可以先根据第二索引值以及第二对应关系确定参考最小时隙间隔，再将参考最小时隙间隔与
Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-100036
确定目标BWP的最小时隙间隔对应的时隙个数，再根据目标BWP的 最小时隙间隔对应的时隙个数以及目标BWP的numerology，确定目标BWP上最小时隙间隔对应的时长。其中，μ 目标为目标BWP的numerology，μ 参考为参考numerology。
其中，第二对应关系包括索引值与参考最小时隙间隔的对应关系。参考最小时隙间隔如前所述，当目标BWP为下行BWP时，参考numerology可以为是某个参考DL BWP的numerology，参考最小时隙间隔可以为参考的最小K0值。当目标BWP为上行BWP时，参考numerology可以为是某个参考UL BWP的numerology，参考最小时隙间隔可以为参考的最小K2值。
其中，第二对应关系可以为数组形式的对应关系，还可以为列表形式的对应关系。如：第二对应关系可以为数组：{索引值0，参考的最小K0值为0}、{索引值1，参考的最小K0值为1}等，或者，第二对应关系如下表五所示，不予限制。
例如，以第二对应关系为列表形式的对应关系、参考最小时隙间隔为参考的最小K0值，目标BWP为DL BWP为例，如下表五所示，索引值为0时，对应的参考的最小K0值为0，索引值为1时，对应的参考的最小K0值为1，索引值为2时，对应的参考的最小K0值为2。若参考numerology为1，目标BWP为DL BWP1，DL BWP1的numerology为0，DL BWP1上一个时隙长度为1ms，最小时隙间隔指示信息包括的第二索引值为2，则以索引值2为索引，查询表五，确定参考的最小K0值为2，DL BWP1的最小时隙间隔为
Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-100037
个时隙，因DL BWP1上一个时隙为1ms，则BWP1的最小时隙间隔为1ms。
表五
索引值 参考的最小K0值
0 0
1 1
2 2
例如，以第二对应关系为列表形式的对应关系、参考最小时隙间隔为参考的最小K2值，目标BWP为UL BWP为例，如下表六所示，索引值为0时，对应的参考的最小K2值为1，索引值为1时，对应的参考的最小K2值为2。若参考numerology为1，目标BWP为UL BWP1，DL BWP1的numerology为0，UL BWP1上一个时隙长度为1ms，最小时隙间隔指示信息包括的第二索引值为1，则以索引值1为索引，查询表六，确定参考的最小K2值为2，UL BWP1的最小时隙间隔为
Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-100038
个时隙，因UL BWP1上一个时隙为1ms，则BWP1的最小时隙间隔为1ms。
表六
索引值 参考的最小K2值
0 1
1 2
此外，本申请实施例中，还存在下述场景：终端的BWP发生了切换，切换前后BWP的numerology是不同的，但终端的调度方式未发生切换，在该场景下，因切换后的BWP的numerology与切换前的BWP的numerology不同，使得切换后的BWP上一个时隙的长度与切换前BWP的时隙长度不同，在切换前的BWP上的最小时隙间隔不适用于切换后的BWP，鉴于此，当终端的BWP发生切换时，本申请还提供可以下述确定切换后的BWP的最小时隙间隔的方法。具体的，该方法可以包括：
终端接收网络设备发送的切换指示；其中，切换指示用于指示将终端由第一BWP切换到第二BWP；终端根据第一BWP上的最小时隙间隔，第一BWP的numerology，以及第二BWP的numerology，确定第二BWP上的最小时隙间隔。
其中，第一BWP可以为第一下行BWP，第二BWP可以为第二下行BWP；或者，第一BWP为第一上行BWP，第二BWP为第二上行BWP，不予限制。当第二BWP为下行BWP时，第二BWP上的最小时隙间隔为下行BWP上的最小K0值，当第二BWP为上行BWP时，第二BWP上的最小时隙间隔为上行BWP上的最小K2值。
示例性的，终端根据第一BWP上的最小时隙间隔，第一BWP的numerology，以及第二BWP的numerology，确定第二BWP上的最小时隙间隔，可以包括：终端根据第一BWP上的最小时隙间隔、第一系数确定第二BWP上的最小时隙间隔。如：终端可以将第一BWP上的最小时隙间隔与第一系数的乘积确定为第二BWP上的最小时隙间隔。
其中，第一系数根据第二BWP的numerology与第一BWP的numerology确定。第一系数等于
Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-100039
其中μ 2为第二BWP的numerology，μ 1为第一BWP的numerology。
具体的，当网络设备指示终端从第一下行BWP切换到第二下行BWP时，最小K0值会发生变化，新的最小K0值可以为：
Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-100040
其中，K0 min,new为新的最小K0值，K0 min,old为终端接收切换指示时生效的最小K0值，
Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-100041
为第二下行BWP的numerology，
Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-100042
为第一下行BWP的numerology。
当网络设备指示终端从第一上行BWP切换到第二上行BWP时，最小K2值会发生变化，新的最小K2值可以为：
Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-100043
其中，K2 min,new为新的最小K2值，K2 min,old为终端接收切换指示时生效的最小K2值，
Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-100044
为第二上行BWP的numerology，
Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-100045
为第一上行BWP的numerology。
例如，网络设备指示终端从第一下行BWP切换到第二下行BWP，第一下行BWP的numerology为1，第二下行BWP的numerology为0，最小时隙间隔为K0值＝2，则第二下行BWP的最小时隙间隔为
Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-100046
个时隙。
又例如，网络设备指示终端从第一上行BWP切换到第二上行BWP，第一上行BWP的numerology为0，第二上行BWP的numerology为1，最小时隙间隔为K2值＝2，则第二上行BWP的最小时隙间隔为
Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-100047
个时隙。
上述主要从各个节点之间交互的角度对本申请实施例提供的方案进行了介绍。可以理解的是，各个节点，例如终端、网络设备为了实现上述功能，其包括了执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。本领域技术人员应该很容易意识到，结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的算法步骤，本申请能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件的结合形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行，取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能，但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。
本申请实施例可以根据上述方法示例对第一设备、第二设备进行功能模块的划分，例 如，可以对应各个功能划分各个功能模块，也可以将两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个处理模块中。上述集成的模块既可以采用硬件的形式实现，也可以采用软件功能模块的形式实现。需要说明的是，本申请实施例中对模块的划分是示意性的，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式。
图12示出了一种通信装置120的结构图，该通信装置120可以为终端，或者终端中的芯片，或者片上系统，该通信装置120可以用于执行上述实施例中涉及的终端的功能。作为一种可实现方式，图12所示通信装置120包括：接收单元1201、确定单元1202；
接收单元1201，用于接收网络设备发送的用于指示终端从第一调度方式切换到第二调度方式的切换指示。例如，接收单元1201用于支持通信装置120执行步骤501。
确定单元1202，用于确定第二调度方式的生效时间。例如，确定单元1202用于支持通信装置120执行步骤502。
具体的，可以参照上述方法实施例所述的方式一～方式七确定第二调度方式的生效时间，不再赘述。或者，在终端的BWP切换的情况下，确定单元1202可以参照上述情况一～情况五所示的确定第二调度方式的生效时间，不予赘述。
另一种可能的设计中，接收单元1201，用于接收网络设备发送的最小时隙间隔指示信息，最小时隙间隔指示信息用于指示目标BWP的最小时隙间隔；
确定单元1202，用于终端根据最小时隙间隔指示信息以及目标BWP的numerology，确定目标BWP的最小时隙间隔，目标BWP的最小时隙间隔基于目标BWP的numerology。
如此，网络设备可以将BWP上的最小时隙间隔指示给终端，以便终端根据网络设备的指示调度数据信道。具体的，最小时隙间隔指示信息的几种可能的设计可参照上述方法实施例中所述，不予赘述。
再一种可能的设计中，在终端的BWP发生了切换，切换前后BWP的numerology是不同的，但终端的调度方式未发生切换的场景下，接收单元1201，用于接收网络设备发送的切换指示；其中，切换指示用于指示将终端由第一BWP切换到第二BWP；
确定单元1202，用于根据第一BWP上的最小时隙间隔，第一BWP的numerology，以及第二BWP的numerology，确定第二BWP上的最小时隙间隔。
具体的，该再一种可能的设计的详细过程可参照上述方法实施例中所述，不予赘述。
作为又一种可实现方式，图12所示通信装置120包括：处理模块和通信模块。处理模块用于对通信装置120的动作进行控制管理，例如，处理模块可以集成确定单元1202的功能，可以用于支持该通信装置120执行步骤502以及本文所描述的技术的其它过程。通信模块可以集成接收单元1201的功能，可以用于支持通信装置120执行步骤501以及与其他网络实体的通信，例如与图2示出的功能模块或网络实体之间的通信。该通信装置120还可以包括存储模块，用于存储通信装置120的程序代码和数据。
其中，处理模块可以是处理器或控制器。其可以实现或执行结合本申请公开内容所描述的各种示例性的逻辑方框，模块和电路。处理器也可以是实现计算功能的组合，例如包含一个或多个微处理器组合，DSP和微处理器的组合等等。通信模块可以是收发电路或通信接口等。存储模块可以是存储器。当处理模块为处理器，通信模块为通信接口，存储模块为存储器时，本申请实施例所涉及的通信装置120可以为图4所示通信装置。
图13为本申请实施例提供的一种调度切换系统的结构图，如图13所示，该通信系统 可以包括：多个终端130、网络设备。
其中，终端130与图12所示的通信装置120的功能类似，可以用于接收网络设备发送的用于指示终端130从第一调度方式切换到第二调度方式的切换指示，并确定第二调度方式的生效时间。
其中，终端130可以参照上述方式一～方式七所述确定第二调度方式的生效时间，不予赘述。或者，在终端的BWP切换的情况下，终端130参照上述情况一～情况五所示的确定第二调度方式的生效时间，不予赘述。
另一种可能的设计中，终端130，用于接收网络设备发送的最小时隙间隔指示信息，最小时隙间隔指示信息用于指示目标BWP的最小时隙间隔，根据最小时隙间隔指示信息以及目标BWP的numerology，确定目标BWP的最小时隙间隔，目标BWP的最小时隙间隔基于目标BWP的numerology。
如此，网络设备可以将BWP上的最小时隙间隔指示给终端，以便终端根据网络设备的指示调度数据信道。具体的，最小时隙间隔指示信息的几种可能的设计可参照上述方法实施例中所述，不予赘述。
再一种可能的设计中，在终端的BWP发生了切换，切换前后BWP的numerology是不同的，但终端的调度方式未发生切换的场景下，终端130，用于接收网络设备发送的切换指示，根据第一BWP上的最小时隙间隔，第一BWP的numerology，以及第二BWP的numerology，确定第二BWP上的最小时隙间隔；其中，切换指示用于指示将终端由第一BWP切换到第二BWP；
具体的，该再一种可能的设计的详细过程可参照上述方法实施例中所述，不予赘述。
需要说明的是，上述方法实施例涉及的各步骤的所有相关内容均可以援引到图5所示实施例中对应功能实体的功能描述，在此不再赘述。
基于图13所示的通信系统，终端130可以从网络设备接收用于指示终端从第一调度方式切换到第二调度方式的切换指示，并在接收到切换指示后，明确切换后的调度方式的生效时间，以便终端130在第二调度方式的生效时间到来时，采用第二调度方式调度数据信道和/触发参考信号，尤其是在第二调度方式为跨时隙调度时，关闭自身的射频模块进入节能状态。
通过以上的实施方式的描述，所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到，为描述的方便和简洁，仅以上述各功能模块的划分进行举例说明，实际应用中，可以根据需要而将上述功能分配由不同的功能模块完成，即将装置的内部结构划分成不同的功能模块，以完成以上描述的全部或者部分功能。
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中，应该理解到，所揭露的装置和方法，可以通过其它的方式实现。例如，以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的，例如，所述模块或单元的划分，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式，例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个装置，或一些特征可以忽略，或不执行。另一点，所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口，装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接，可以是电性，机械或其它的形式。
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的，作为单元显示的部件可以是一个物理单元或多个物理单元，即可位于一个地方，或者也可以分布到多个不 同地方。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。
另外，在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中，也可以是各个单元单独物理存在，也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现，也可以采用软件功能单元的形式实现。
所述集成的单元如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时，可以存储在一个可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解，本申请实施例的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的全部或部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来，该软件产品存储在一个存储介质中，包括若干指令用以使得一个设备(可以是单片机，芯片等)或处理器(processor)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括：U盘、移动硬盘、ROM、RAM、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。
以上所述，仅为本申请的具体实施方式，但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此，任何在本申请揭露的技术范围内的变化或替换，都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此，本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。

Claims (53)

  1. 一种调度切换方法，其特征在于，包括：
    终端接收网络设备发送的切换指示；其中，所述切换指示用于指示所述终端从第一调度方式切换到第二调度方式；所述第一调度方式与所述第二调度方式不同；
    所述终端确定所述第二调度方式的生效时间；其中，所述第二调度方式的生效时间为所述终端可采用所述第二调度方式调度数据信道和/或触发参考信号的时间。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述切换指示包括在物理下行控制信道PDCCH中，所述第二调度方式的生效时间为：
    所述PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的最后一个符号的下一符号；或者，
    所述PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的时隙的下一时隙；或者，
    所述PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机；
    其中，所述PDCCH的反馈信息用于指示所述终端是否正确接收到所述PDCCH；所述调度信息监测时机为所述终端监测用于调度数据信道的PDCCH的时机。
  3. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述切换指示包括在PDCCH中，所述PDCCH用于调度所述终端的下行数据信道；所述第二调度方式的生效时间为：
    所述下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的最后一个符号的下一个符号；或者，
    所述下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时隙的下一时隙；或者，
    所述下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机；
    其中，所述数据信道的反馈信息用于指示所述终端是否接收到所述数据信道；所述调度信息监测时机为所述终端监测用于调度数据信道的PDCCH的时机。
  4. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述切换指示包括在PDCCH中，所述PDCCH用于调度所述终端的上行数据信道；所述第二调度方式的生效时间为：
    所述上行数据信道所占用的最后一个符号的下一个符号；或者，
    所述上行数据信道所占用的时隙的下一时隙；或者，
    所述上行数据信道所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机；
    其中，所述调度信息监测时机为所述终端监测用于调度数据信道的PDCCH的时机。
  5. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述切换指示包括在PDCCH中，所述PDCCH位于第N个时隙，所述N为整数；所述第二调度方式的生效时间为：
    第N+M个时隙，或者，不早于第N+M个时隙的第一个调度信息监测时机；
    其中，所述M根据所述终端接收所述切换指示时生效的时隙差的最小值确定，所述时隙差指调度数据信道的PDCCH所占用的时隙与所述调度数据信道的PDCCH调度的数据信道所占用的时隙之间的时隙差。
  6. 根据权利要求5所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述M等于所述最小值；或者，
    所述M等于所述最小值与第一数值之和；或者，
    所述M为第二数值与所述最小值中的最大值。
  7. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述切换指示包括在媒体接入控制控制元素MAC CE中，所述MAC CE包括在物理下行数据信道PDSCH中；
    所述第二调度方式的生效时间在所述PDSCH的反馈信息所占用的时隙之后，且所述 第二调度方式的生效时间与所述PDSCH的反馈信息所占用的时隙间隔第一时长；
    其中，所述PDSCH的反馈信息用于指示所述终端是否正确接收到所述PDSCH。
  8. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述终端接收所述网络设备发送的生效指示，所述生效指示用于指示所述第二调度方式的生效时间；
    所述终端确定所述第二调度方式的生效时间，包括：所述终端根据所述生效指示，确定所述第二调度方式的生效时间。
  9. 根据权利要求8所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述生效指示包括在PDCCH或者PDSCH中。
  10. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二调度方式的生效时间为：
    第一调度信息调度的数据信道占用的最后一个符号的下一符号；或者，
    第一调度信息调度的数据信道占用的时隙的下一时隙；或者，
    第一调度信息调度的数据信道占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机；
    其中，所述第一调度信息的时域位置不晚于所述切换指示所占用的时域位置，所述调度信息监测时机为所述终端监测用于调度数据信道的PDCCH的时机。
  11. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述切换指示包括在PDCCH中，所述第二调度方式的生效时间为：
    第一调度信息调度的下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的最后一个符号的下一符号；或者，
    第一调度信息调度的下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时隙的下一时隙；或者，
    第一调度信息调度的下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机；
    其中，所述第一调度信息的时域位置不晚于所述切换指示所占用的时域位置，所述调度信息监测时机为所述终端开始监测PDCCH的时机。
  12. 根据权利要求10或11所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第一调度信息为不晚于所述切换指示的所有调度信息中，调度的数据信道是最晚传输的数据信道的调度信息。
  13. 根据权利要求1-11任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一调度方式、所述第二调度方式由以下至少一项参数指示：生效的最小K0值，生效的最小K2值，生效的最小非周期信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS触发偏移值，生效的最小非周期探测参考信号SRS触发偏移值；
    其中，所述K0值为PDCCH所在的时隙与其调度的PDSCH所在的时隙之间的时隙差；
    所述K2值为PDCCH所在的时隙与其调度的PUSCH所在的时隙之间的时隙差；
    所述非周期CSI-RS触发偏移值为PDCCH所在的时隙与其触发的非周期CSI-RS所在的时隙之间的时隙差；
    所述非周期SRS触发偏移值为PDCCH所在的时隙与其触发的非周期SRS所在的时隙之间的时隙差。
  14. 根据权利要求1-13任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述切换指示包括在PDCCH中，所述切换指示还用于指示所述终端从第一BWP切换到第二BWP；所述终端确定所述 第二调度方式的生效时间，包括：
    所述终端根据所述PDCCH所在时隙N、生效的最小时隙间隔以及目标系数，确定在目标BWP上，所述第二调度方式的生效时间；
    其中，所述N为自然数，所述目标系数根据所述目标BWP的系统参数numerology与第一下行BWP的numerology确定，所述第一下行BWP为所述终端接收所述切换指示时激活的下行BWP。
  15. 根据权利要求14所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第二调度方式的生效时间不早于第Q个时隙；
    所述Q等于
    Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-100048
    其中，所述M等于所述生效的最小时隙间隔；或者，所述M等于所述生效的最小时隙间隔与第一数值之和；或者，所述M为第二数值与所述所述生效的最小时隙间隔中的最大值。
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二调度方式的生效时间不早于第Q个时隙，包括：所述第二调度方式的生效时间为所述第Q个时隙的起始位置。
  17. 根据权利要求14-16任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述目标系数等于
    Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-100049
    其中μ T为所述目标BWP的参数numerology，所述μ 1为所述第一下行BWP的numerology。
  18. 根据权利要求14-17任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第一BWP为所述第一下行BWP，所述第二BWP为第二下行BWP；所述第一调度方式为第一下行调度方式，所述第二调度方式为第二下行调度方式；所述目标BWP为所述第二下行BWP；或者
    所述第一BWP为所述第一下行BWP，所述第二BWP为第二下行BWP；所述第一调度方式为第一上行调度方式，所述第二调度方式为第二上行调度方式；所述目标BWP为所述第一上行BWP；或者
    所述第一BWP为所述第一上行BWP，所述第二BWP为第二上行BWP；所述第一调度方式为第一下行调度方式，所述第二调度方式为第二下行调度方式；所述目标BWP为所述第一下行BWP；或者
    所述第一BWP为所述第一上行BWP，所述第二BWP为第二上行BWP；所述第一调度方式为第一上行调度方式，所述第二调度方式为第二上行调度方式；所述目标BWP为所述第二上行BWP。
  19. 根据权利要求1-18任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述切换指示还用于指示下述一种或者多种参数：所述终端的PDCCH跳过skipping、所述终端监测PDCCH的周期、所述终端的多输入多输出MIMO参数、所述终端监测的搜索空间和/CORESET；
    其中，所述一种或者多种参数的生效时间与所述第二调度方式的生效时间相同。
  20. 一种通信装置，所述通信装置为终端或者终端中的芯片或者终端中的基带处理器，其特征在于，所述通信装置被配置为：
    接收网络设备发送的切换指示；其中，所述切换指示用于指示所述终端从第一调度方式切换到第二调度方式；所述第一调度方式与所述第二调度方式不同；
    以及，确定所述第二调度方式的生效时间；其中，所述第二调度方式的生效时间为所 述终端可采用所述第二调度方式调度数据信道和/或触发参考信号的时间。
  21. 根据权利要求20所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述切换指示包括在物理下行控制信道PDCCH中，所述第二调度方式的生效时间为：
    所述PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的最后一个符号的下一符号；或者，
    所述PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的时隙的下一时隙；或者，
    所述PDCCH的反馈信息所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机；
    其中，所述PDCCH的反馈信息用于指示所述终端是否正确接收到所述PDCCH；所述调度信息监测时机为所述终端监测用于调度数据信道的PDCCH的时机。
  22. 根据权利要求20所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述切换指示包括在PDCCH中，所述PDCCH用于调度所述终端的下行数据信道；所述第二调度方式的生效时间为：
    所述下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的最后一个符号的下一个符号；或者，
    所述下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时隙的下一时隙；或者，
    所述下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机；
    其中，所述数据信道的反馈信息用于指示所述终端是否接收到所述数据信道；所述调度信息监测时机为所述终端监测用于调度数据信道的PDCCH的时机。
  23. 根据权利要求20所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述切换指示包括在PDCCH中，所述PDCCH用于调度所述终端的上行数据信道；所述第二调度方式的生效时间为：
    所述上行数据信道所占用的最后一个符号的下一个符号；或者，
    所述上行数据信道所占用的时隙的下一时隙；或者，
    所述上行数据信道所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机；
    其中，所述调度信息监测时机为所述终端监测用于调度数据信道的PDCCH的时机。
  24. 根据权利要求20所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述切换指示包括在PDCCH中，所述PDCCH位于第N个时隙，所述N为整数；所述第二调度方式的生效时间为：
    第N+M个时隙，或者，不早于第N+M个时隙的第一个调度信息监测时机；
    其中，所述M根据所述终端接收所述切换指示时生效的时隙差的最小值确定，所述时隙差指调度数据信道的PDCCH所占用的时隙与所述调度数据信道的PDCCH调度的数据信道所占用的时隙之间的时隙差。
  25. 根据权利要求24所述的通信装置，其特征在于，
    所述M等于所述最小值；或者，
    所述M等于所述最小值与第一数值之和；或者，
    所述M为第二数值与所述最小值中的最大值。
  26. 根据权利要求20所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述切换指示包括在媒体接入控制控制元素MAC CE中，所述MAC CE包括在物理下行数据信道PDSCH中；
    所述第二调度方式的生效时间在所述PDSCH的反馈信息所占用的时隙之后，且所述第二调度方式的生效时间与所述PDSCH的反馈信息所占用的时隙间隔第一时长；
    其中，所述PDSCH的反馈信息用于指示所述终端是否正确接收到所述PDSCH。
  27. 根据权利要求20所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述通信装置具体被配置为：
    接收所述网络设备发送的生效指示，根据所述生效指示，确定所述第二调度方式的生效时间；所述生效指示用于指示所述第二调度方式的生效时间。
  28. 根据权利要求27所述的通信装置，其特征在于，
    所述生效指示包括在PDCCH或者PDSCH中。
  29. 根据权利要求20所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述第二调度方式的生效时间为：
    第一调度信息调度的数据信道占用的最后一个符号的下一符号；或者，
    第一调度信息调度的数据信道占用的时隙的下一时隙；或者，
    第一调度信息调度的数据信道占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机；
    其中，所述第一调度信息的时域位置不晚于所述切换指示所占用的时域位置，所述调度信息监测时机为所述终端监测用于调度数据信道的PDCCH的时机。
  30. 根据权利要求20所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述切换指示包括在PDCCH中，所述第二调度方式的生效时间为：
    第一调度信息调度的下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的最后一个符号的下一符号；或者，
    第一调度信息调度的下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时隙的下一时隙；或者，
    第一调度信息调度的下行数据信道的反馈信息所占用的时域位置之后的第一个调度信息监测时机；
    其中，所述第一调度信息的时域位置不晚于所述切换指示所占用的时域位置，所述调度信息监测时机为所述终端开始监测PDCCH的时机。
  31. 根据权利要求29或30所述的通信装置，其特征在于，
    所述第一调度信息为不晚于所述切换指示的所有调度信息中，调度的数据信道是最晚传输的数据信道的调度信息。
  32. 根据权利要求20-31任一项所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述第一调度方式、所述第二调度方式由以下至少一项参数指示：生效的最小K0值，生效的最小K2值，生效的最小非周期信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS触发偏移值，生效的最小非周期探测参考信号SRS触发偏移值；
    其中，所述K0值为PDCCH所在的时隙与其调度的PDSCH所在的时隙之间的时隙差；
    所述K2值为PDCCH所在的时隙与其调度的PUSCH所在的时隙之间的时隙差；
    所述非周期CSI-RS触发偏移值为PDCCH所在的时隙与其触发的非周期CSI-RS所在的时隙之间的时隙差；
    所述非周期SRS触发偏移值为PDCCH所在的时隙与其触发的非周期SRS所在的时隙之间的时隙差。
  33. 根据权利要求20-32任一项所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述切换指示包括在PDCCH中，所述切换指示还用于指示所述终端从第一BWP切换到第二BWP；
    所述通信装置具体用于根据所述PDCCH所在时隙N、生效的最小时隙间隔以及目标系数，确定在目标BWP上，所述第二调度方式的生效时间；
    其中，所述N为自然数，所述目标系数根据所述目标BWP的系统参数numerology与第一下行BWP的numerology确定，所述第一下行BWP为所述终端接收所述切换指示时激活的下行BWP。
  34. 根据权利要求33所述的通信装置，其特征在于，
    所述第二调度方式的生效时间不早于第Q个时隙；
    所述Q等于
    Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-100050
    其中，所述M等于所述生效的最小时隙间隔；或者，所述M等于所述生效的最小时隙间隔与第一数值之和；或者，所述M为第二数值与所述所述生效的最小时隙间隔中的最大值。
  35. 根据权利要求34所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述第二调度方式的生效时间不早于第Q个时隙，包括：所述第二调度方式的生效时间为所述第Q个时隙的起始位置。
  36. 根据权利要求33-35任一项所述的通信装置，其特征在于，
    所述目标系数等于
    Figure PCTCN2020086528-appb-100051
    其中μ T为所述目标BWP的参数numerology，所述μ 1为所述第一下行BWP的numerology。
  37. 根据权利要求33-36任一项所述的通信装置，其特征在于，
    所述第一BWP为所述第一下行BWP，所述第二BWP为第二下行BWP；所述第一调度方式为第一下行调度方式，所述第二调度方式为第二下行调度方式；所述目标BWP为所述第二下行BWP；或者
    所述第一BWP为所述第一下行BWP，所述第二BWP为第二下行BWP；所述第一调度方式为第一上行调度方式，所述第二调度方式为第二上行调度方式；所述目标BWP为所述第一上行BWP；或者
    所述第一BWP为所述第一上行BWP，所述第二BWP为第二上行BWP；所述第一调度方式为第一下行调度方式，所述第二调度方式为第二下行调度方式；所述目标BWP为所述第一下行BWP；或者
    所述第一BWP为所述第一上行BWP，所述第二BWP为第二上行BWP；所述第一调度方式为第一上行调度方式，所述第二调度方式为第二上行调度方式；所述目标BWP为所述第二上行BWP。
  38. 根据权利要求20-37任一项所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述切换指示还用于指示下述一种或者多种参数：所述终端的PDCCH跳过skipping、所述终端监测PDCCH的周期、所述终端的多输入多输出MIMO参数、所述终端监测的搜索空间和/CORESET；
    其中，所述一种或者多种参数的生效时间与所述第二调度方式的生效时间相同。
  39. 一种终端，其特征在于，包括：所述终端包括处理器、存储器，所述存储器中存储有指令，当所述指令被所述处理器执行时，使得所述终端实现如权利要求1-19任一项所述的调度切换方法。
  40. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其特征在于，所述计算机可读存储介质包括计算机指令，当所述计算机指令在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行如权利要求1-19任一项所述的调度切换方法。
  41. 一种调度方法，其特征在于，所述方法包括：
    终端接收网络设备发送的最小时隙间隔指示信息，所述最小时隙间隔指示信息用于指示目标BWP的最小时隙间隔；
    所述终端根据所述最小时隙间隔指示信息以及目标BWP的系统参数numerology，确定所述目标BWP的最小时隙间隔，所述目标BWP的最小时隙间隔基于所述目标BWP的numerology。
  42. 根据权利要求41所述的方法，其特征在于，所述最小时隙间隔指示信息包括所述目标BWP的最小时隙间隔对应的数值。
  43. 根据权利要求41所述的方法，其特征在于，所述最小时隙间隔指示信息包括参考最小时隙间隔对应的数值；所述终端根据所述最小时隙间隔指示信息以及目标BWP的numerology，确定所述目标BWP的最小时隙间隔，包括：
    所述终端根据所述参考最小时隙间隔对应的数值、参考numerology以及所述目标BWP的numerology，确定所述目标BWP的最小时隙间隔。
  44. 根据权利要求41所述的方法，其特征在于，所述最小时隙间隔指示信息包括第一索引值，所述终端根据所述最小时隙间隔指示信息以及目标BWP的numerology，确定所述目标BWP的最小时隙间隔，包括：
    所述终端根据所述第一索引值、第一对应关系以及所述目标BWP的numerology，确定所述目标BWP的最小时隙间隔；其中，所述第一对应关系包括索引值与所述目标BWP的最小时隙间隔的对应关系。
  45. 根据权利要求41所述的方法，其特征在于，所述最小时隙间隔指示信息包括第二索引值；所述终端根据所述最小时隙间隔指示信息以及目标BWP的numerology，确定所述目标BWP的最小时隙间隔，包括：
    所述终端根据所述第二索引值，第二对应关系、参考numerology以及所述目标BWP的numerology，确定所述目标BWP的最小时隙间隔；其中，所述第二对应关系包括索引值与参考最小时隙间隔的对应关系。
  46. 一种通信装置，所述通信装置为终端或者终端中的芯片或者终端中的基带处理器，其特征在于，所述通信装置被配置为：
    接收网络设备发送的最小时隙间隔指示信息，所述最小时隙间隔指示信息用于指示目标BWP的最小时隙间隔；
    根据所述最小时隙间隔指示信息以及目标BWP的系统参数numerology，确定所述目标BWP的最小时隙间隔，所述目标BWP的最小时隙间隔基于所述目标BWP的numerology。
  47. 根据权利要求46所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述最小时隙间隔指示信息包括所述目标BWP的最小时隙间隔对应的数值。
  48. 根据权利要求46所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述最小时隙间隔指示信息包括参考最小时隙间隔对应的数值；所述通信装置，具体用于：
    根据所述参考最小时隙间隔对应的数值、参考numerology以及所述目标BWP的numerology，确定所述目标BWP的最小时隙间隔。
  49. 根据权利要求46所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述最小时隙间隔指示信息包括第一索引值，所述通信装置，具体用于：
    所述终端根据所述第一索引值、第一对应关系以及所述目标BWP的numerology，确定所述目标BWP的最小时隙间隔；其中，所述第一对应关系包括索引值与所述目标BWP的最小时隙间隔的对应关系。
  50. 根据权利要求46所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述最小时隙间隔指示信息包括第二索引值；所述通信装置，具体用于：
    所述终端根据所述第二索引值，第二对应关系、参考numerology以及所述目标BWP的 numerology，确定所述目标BWP的最小时隙间隔；其中，所述第二对应关系包括索引值与参考最小时隙间隔的对应关系。
  51. 一种终端，其特征在于，包括：所述终端包括处理器、存储器，所述存储器中存储有指令，当所述指令被所述处理器执行时，使得所述终端实现如权利要求41-45任一项所述的调度切换方法。
  52. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其特征在于，所述计算机可读存储介质包括计算机指令，当所述计算机指令在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行如权利要求41-45任一项所述的调度切换方法。
  53. 一种计算机程序产品，其特征在于，所述计算机程序产品包括计算机指令，当所述计算机指令在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行如权利要求41-45任一项所述的调度切换方法。
PCT/CN2020/086528 2019-04-30 2020-04-24 一种调度切换方法及装置 WO2020221111A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (8)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202080029987.3A CN114128199A (zh) 2019-04-30 2020-04-24 一种调度切换方法及装置
JP2021564665A JP7201843B2 (ja) 2019-04-30 2020-04-24 スケジューリング切り替え方法及び装置
AU2020265040A AU2020265040B2 (en) 2019-04-30 2020-04-24 Scheduling switching method and apparatus
US17/607,682 US20220232599A1 (en) 2019-04-30 2020-04-24 Scheduling Switching Method and Apparatus
KR1020217038782A KR20220002530A (ko) 2019-04-30 2020-04-24 스케줄링 스위칭 방법 및 장치
CA3135474A CA3135474A1 (en) 2019-04-30 2020-04-24 Scheduling switching method and apparatus
EP20798895.7A EP3961957A4 (en) 2019-04-30 2020-04-24 Scheduling switching method and apparatus
JP2022205008A JP7462018B2 (ja) 2019-04-30 2022-12-22 スケジューリング切り替え方法及び装置

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201910364535.X 2019-04-30
CN201910364535 2019-04-30
CN201910498052.9A CN111865541B (zh) 2019-04-30 2019-06-10 一种调度切换方法及装置
CN201910498052.9 2019-06-10

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020221111A1 true WO2020221111A1 (zh) 2020-11-05

Family

ID=72966077

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/086528 WO2020221111A1 (zh) 2019-04-30 2020-04-24 一种调度切换方法及装置

Country Status (8)

Country Link
US (1) US20220232599A1 (zh)
EP (1) EP3961957A4 (zh)
JP (2) JP7201843B2 (zh)
KR (1) KR20220002530A (zh)
CN (2) CN111865541B (zh)
AU (1) AU2020265040B2 (zh)
CA (1) CA3135474A1 (zh)
WO (1) WO2020221111A1 (zh)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2022116965A1 (zh) * 2020-12-03 2022-06-09 华为技术有限公司 一种物理下行控制信道监测的方法及装置
JP2022538207A (ja) * 2019-05-14 2022-09-01 日本電気株式会社 通信方法

Families Citing this family (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN111865541B (zh) 2019-04-30 2023-11-21 华为技术有限公司 一种调度切换方法及装置
CN114930961A (zh) * 2020-12-11 2022-08-19 北京小米移动软件有限公司 一种调度方式的切换方法及装置
CN115884407A (zh) * 2021-08-06 2023-03-31 华为技术有限公司 无线通信方法、装置及系统
CN113783675B (zh) * 2021-08-06 2022-11-11 中国信息通信研究院 一种控制信息传送方法和设备

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101860948A (zh) * 2009-04-13 2010-10-13 华为技术有限公司 功耗调节的方法、设备及系统
US20190090299A1 (en) * 2017-09-20 2019-03-21 Qualcomm Incorporated Techniques and apparatuses for bandwidth part wake-up signaling
CN109586877A (zh) * 2017-09-29 2019-04-05 北京三星通信技术研究有限公司 上行传输方法和相应设备

Family Cites Families (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP3242416B1 (en) * 2012-02-11 2020-09-02 LG Electronics Inc. Method for receiving downlink data channels in multicell-based wireless communication systems and apparatus for same
CN109451792B (zh) * 2017-08-11 2021-02-09 北京小米移动软件有限公司 调整信息传输的方法、基站及用户设备
WO2019050379A1 (en) * 2017-09-11 2019-03-14 Lg Electronics Inc. METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING DOWNLINK CONTROL INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
CN109586881B (zh) * 2017-09-29 2021-11-12 株式会社Kt 用于在新无线电中切换带宽部分的方法和装置
CN109600845A (zh) * 2017-09-30 2019-04-09 华为技术有限公司 一种资源调度方法、网络设备以及通信设备
CN111865541B (zh) 2019-04-30 2023-11-21 华为技术有限公司 一种调度切换方法及装置

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101860948A (zh) * 2009-04-13 2010-10-13 华为技术有限公司 功耗调节的方法、设备及系统
US20190090299A1 (en) * 2017-09-20 2019-03-21 Qualcomm Incorporated Techniques and apparatuses for bandwidth part wake-up signaling
CN109586877A (zh) * 2017-09-29 2019-04-05 北京三星通信技术研究有限公司 上行传输方法和相应设备

Non-Patent Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
APPLE INC: "Cross Slot Scheduling for UE Power Saving", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-1907346, vol. RAN WG1, 17 May 2019 (2019-05-17), Reno, USA, pages 1 - 10, XP051709368 *
GUANGDONG OPPO MOBILE TELECOM: "Remaining issues on bandwidth part configuration and activation", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-1713266, vol. RAN WG1, 25 August 2017 (2017-08-25), Prague, Czech Republic, pages 1 - 6, XP051316073 *
HUAWEI; HISILICON: "Procedure of cross-slot scheduling for UE power saving", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-1906006, vol. RAN WG1, 17 May 2019 (2019-05-17), Reno, USA, pages 1 - 12, XP051708048 *
HUAWEI; HISILICON: "Procedure of cross-slot scheduling for UE power saving", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-1908070, vol. RAN WG1, 30 August 2019 (2019-08-30), Prague, Czech Republic, pages 1 - 12, XP051764693 *
QUALCOMM INC.: "R1-1802844, Remaining Issues on BWP", 3GPP TSG RAN WG1 MEETING #92, 2 March 2018 (2018-03-02), XP051398257 *
QUALCOMM INCORPORATED: "Cross-slot scheduling power saving techniques", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-1905032, vol. RAN WG1, 12 April 2019 (2019-04-12), Xi’an, China, pages 1 - 12, XP051707368 *
QUALCOMM INCORPORATED: "UE Adaptation to the Traffic and UE Power Consumption Characteristics", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-1813447, vol. RAN WG1, 16 November 2018 (2018-11-16), Spokane Washington USA, pages 1 - 20, XP051479769 *

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2022538207A (ja) * 2019-05-14 2022-09-01 日本電気株式会社 通信方法
WO2022116965A1 (zh) * 2020-12-03 2022-06-09 华为技术有限公司 一种物理下行控制信道监测的方法及装置

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
AU2020265040A1 (en) 2021-12-02
JP7201843B2 (ja) 2023-01-10
KR20220002530A (ko) 2022-01-06
JP7462018B2 (ja) 2024-04-04
CN111865541A (zh) 2020-10-30
CN111865541B (zh) 2023-11-21
CA3135474A1 (en) 2020-11-05
AU2020265040B2 (en) 2023-08-17
EP3961957A1 (en) 2022-03-02
JP2023040055A (ja) 2023-03-22
CN114128199A (zh) 2022-03-01
EP3961957A4 (en) 2022-06-29
JP2022531278A (ja) 2022-07-06
US20220232599A1 (en) 2022-07-21

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2020221111A1 (zh) 一种调度切换方法及装置
US11838980B2 (en) Method and apparatus for determining TDD UL-DL configuration applicable for radio frames
CN110012499A (zh) 用于控制SCell状态的方法及其装置
TWI674786B (zh) 上行消息傳輸方法
KR102541273B1 (ko) 단말 에너지 절약 제어 방법, 장치 및 기기
WO2020192780A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及装置
JP7377270B2 (ja) Ｕｅ支援情報を送信することに関するユーザ装置
CA3135310A1 (en) Wireless communication method, terminal device, and network device
TWI791079B (zh) 一種傳輸方向的確定方法及裝置、電腦存儲媒介
KR20220044585A (ko) Dl 및 ul 송신을 위한 패널-특정 보고의 방법
CN116326112A (zh) 用于放宽的ue处理时间的方法
WO2020253641A1 (zh) 一种信道状态测量参数指示方法及装置
JP2022543163A (ja) 時間領域スケジューリングに関与するユーザ装置および基地局
JP6517938B2 (ja) Ｐｕｃｃｈ構成方法および装置
TW202126085A (zh) 使用者設備、排程節點、用於使用者設備之方法及用於排程節點之方法
WO2021035448A1 (zh) 一种跨时隙调度的指示方法及装置
WO2021072610A1 (zh) 一种激活和释放非动态调度传输的方法及装置
WO2016169479A1 (zh) 一种数据传输方法及设备
JP2021521729A (ja) 曖昧期間の長さの特定方法、端末及びネットワーク側機器
WO2021159398A1 (zh) 波束失败恢复的方法和装置
WO2014032724A1 (en) Scheduling wireless communications
CN115868131A (zh) 用户设备、调度节点、用于用户设备的方法和用于调度节点的方法
RU2794909C2 (ru) Способ и устройство переключения планирования
RU2789380C1 (ru) Способ и устройство переключения планирования
WO2023024777A1 (zh) 使用配置授权传输资源传输数据包的方法以及相关联的通信装置、介质和芯片

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20798895

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 3135474

Country of ref document: CA

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2021564665

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 20217038782

Country of ref document: KR

Kind code of ref document: A

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2020265040

Country of ref document: AU

Date of ref document: 20200424

Kind code of ref document: A

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2020798895

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20211126